Brother All in One Printer MFC8820D User Manual

_MM_FF_CC_--8420

_MFC-88₈8₂2₀0_DD_N

Version A

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother numbers

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the MFC.

Calls must be made from within that country.

By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be

recorded as the original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:

■

may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you

lose your receipt;

■ may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product

loss covered by insurance; and,

■

will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.

Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet

or, for your convenience and most efficient way to register your new

product, register on-line at

www.registermybrother.com

Frequently asked questions (FAQs)

The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax

Machine/Multi-Function Center needs. You can download the latest software and

utilities, read FAQs and troubleshooting tips, and go to the “Solutions” section to

learn how to get the most from your Brother product.

http://solutions.brother.com

You can check here for Brother driver updates.

For Customer Service

In USA:

1-800-284-4329 (voice)

1-901-379-1215 (fax)

1-800-284-3238 (TTY service for the hearing-impaired)

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER (voice)

(514) 685-4898 (fax)

(514) 685-6464 (voice) In Montreal

Service Center Locator (USA only)

For the location of aBrother authorized service center, call 1-800-284-4357.

Service Center Locations (Canada only)

For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.

BROTHER NUMBERS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother fax back system (USA only)

Brother has installed an easy-to-use fax back system, so you can get

instant answers to common technical questions and product information for

all Brother products. This system is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a

week. You can use and an Index of fax back subjects.

In USA only:

1-800-521-2846

The Brother fax back system number has been preprogramming on One-

Touch Key 01.

Ordering accessories and supplies

For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are

available at most Brother retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you

need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or American Express

credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (In the USA,

you can visit us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories

and supplies that are available for purchase.)

In USA:

1-888-879-3232 (voice)

1-800-947-1445 (fax)

http://w ww.brothermall.com

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER (voice)

Description

Item

Toner Cartridge

TN-530 (Standard, prints up to 3,300 pages)

TN-560 (High yield, prints up to 6,500 pages)

Drum Unit

DR-500

Telephone Line Cord

LG3077001

F2A046-10

QPD120

IEEE-1284 Bi-directional Cable

Power Protector for A/C Power, Phone

Line Surges and Voltage Spikes (2 outlets)

Power Protector for A/C Power, Phone

Line Surges and Voltage Spikes (8 outlets)

Paper Tray #2 (Option)

FX120

LT-5000

Network (LAN) Board (Option)

NC-9100h

Brother Print/Fax Server

(10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Network)

User's Guide

LE8881001 (English for USA and Canada)

LE8931001 (French For Canada)

Quick Setup Guide

LE8883001 (English for USA and Canada)

LE8936001 (French For Canada)

ORDERING ACCESSORIES AND SUPPLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties

(USA and Canada)

BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,

EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S

LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES

NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS

REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE

SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,

RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK

AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS

ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS

NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME

PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT

APPLY TO YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU

FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTALOR INDIRECT DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION,

AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE

THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE

SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA

DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE

LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT

BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL

DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS

OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR

OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.

Compilation and Publication Notice

Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been

compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and

specifications.

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are

subject to change without notice.

Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the

specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be

responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by

reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to

typographical and other errors relating to the publication.

NOTICE – DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother^®One Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service

(USA only)

Who is cover ed:

but not limited to damage resulting from

use of non Brother^®-brand parts and

Consumable and Accessory Items);

• This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given

only to the original end-use/retail

purchaser (referred to in this warranty as

“Original Purchaser”) of the accompanying

product, consumables and accessories

(collectively referred to in this warranty as

“this Product”).

(4) Consumable and Accessory Items that

expired in accordance with a rated life;

and,

(5) Problems arising from other than defects

in materials or workmanship.

• If you purchased a product from someone

other than an authorized Brother reseller in

the United States or if the product was

used (including but not limited to floor

models or refurbished product), prior to

your purchase you are not the Original

Purchaser and the product that you

purchased isnot covered by this warranty.

This limited warranty is VOID if this Product

has been altered or modified in any way

(including but not limited to attempted

warranty repair without authorization from

Brother and/or alteration/removal of the

serial number).

What to do if you think your Product is

eligible for warranty service:

What is covered:

Report your issue to either our Customer

Service Hotline at 1-800-284-4329 or a

Brother Authorized Service Center within

the applicable warranty period. Supply

Brother or the Brother Authorized Service

Center with a copy of your dated bill of sale

showing that this Product was purchased

within the U.S. For the name of local Brother

• This Product includes a Machine and

Consumable and Accessory Items.

Consumable and Accessory Items include

but are not limited to print heads, toner,

drums, ink cartridges, print cartridges, refill

ribbons, therma PLUS paper and thermal

paper.

• Except as otherwise provided herein,

Brother warrants that the Machine and the

Authorized

Service

Center(s),

call

1-800-521-2846.

accompanying

Consumable

and

What Brother will ask you to do:

After contacting Brother or

Accessory Itemswillbe free from defectsin

materials and workmanship, when used

under normal conditions.

Brother

Authorized Service Center, you may be

required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or

send the Product properly packaged, freight

prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center

together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.

You are responsible for the cost of

• This warranty applies only to products

purchased and used in the United States.

For products purchased in, but used

outside, the United States, this warranty

covers only warranty service within the

United States (and does not include

shipping outside the United States).

shipping,

packing

product,

and

insurance (if you desire). You are also

responsible for loss or damage to this

Product in shipping.

What is the length of the Warranty Periods:

• Machines: one year from the original

purchase date.

What Brother will do:

If the problem reported concerning your

Machine and/or accompanying Consumable

and Accessory Items is covered by this

warranty and if you first reported the problem

to Brother or an Authorized Service Center

within the applicable warranty period,

Brother or its Authorized Service Center will

repair or replace the Machine and/or

accompanying Consumable and Accessory

Items at no charge to you for parts or labor.

The decision as to whether to repair or

replace the Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items is made

by Brother in its sole discretion. Brother

reserves the right to supply a refurbished or

• Accompanying

Consumable

and

Accessory Items: 90 days from the original

purchase date or the rated life of

consumable, whichever comes first.

What is NOT covered:

This warranty does not cover:

(1) Physical damage to this Product;

(2) Damage caused by improper installation,

improper or abnormal use, misuse,

neglect or accident (including but not

limited to transporting this Product

without the proper preparation and/or

packaging);

remanufactured

replacement

Machine

(3) Damage caused by another device or

software used with this Product(including

and/or accompanying Consumable and

Accessory Items and use refurbished parts

MFC LIMITED WARRANTY (USA)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother^®One Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service

(USA only)

provided such replacement products

conform to the manufacturer's specifications

for new product/parts. The repaired or

replacement Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items will be

returned to you freight prepaid or made

available for you to pick up at a conveniently

located Authorized Service Center.

If the Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items are not

covered by this warranty (either stage), you

will be charged for shipping the Machine

and/or accompanying Consumable and

Accessory Items back to you.

covered by the balance of the limited

warranty period remaining on the original

Product, plus an additional thirty (30) days.

You will keep the replacement Machine that

is sent to you and your original Machine shall

become the propertyof Brother.Retain your

original Accessory Items and a copy of

the return freight bill, signed by the

courier.

Limitations:

Brother is not responsible for damage to or

loss of any equipment, media, programs or

data related to the use of this Product.

Except for that repair or replacement as

described above, Brother shall not be liable

for any direct, indirect, incidental or

consequential damages or specific relief.

Because some states do not allow the

exclusion or limitation of consequential or

incidental damages, the above limitation

may not apply to you.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF

ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR

ORAL, WHETHER EXPRESSED BY

AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,

DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY

AND ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN

THIS ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR

The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only)

and exclusive remedies under this

warranty.

What happens when Brother elects to

r eplace your Machine:

When a replacement Machine is authorized

by Brother, and you have delivered the

Machine to an Authorized Service Center,

the Authorized Service Center will provide

you with

replacement Machine after

receiving one from Brother. If you are

dealing directly with Brother, Brother will

send to you a replacement Machine with the

understanding that you will, after receipt of

the replacement Machine, supply the

required proof of purchase information,

together with the Machine that Brother

agreed to replace. You are then expected to

pack the Machine that Brother agreed to

replace in the package from the replacement

Machine and return it to Brother using the

pre-paid freight bill supplied by Brother in

accordance with the instructions provided by

Brother. Since you will be in possession of

two machines, Brother will require that you

provide a valid major credit card number.

Brother will issue a hold against the credit

card account number that you provide until

Brother receives your original Product and

determines that your original Product is

entitled to warranty coverage. Your credit

card will be charged up to the cost of a new

Product only if: (i) you do not return your

original Product to Brother within five (5)

business days; (ii) the problems with your

original Product are not covered by the

limited warranty; (iii) the proper packaging

instructions are not followed and has caused

damage to the product; or (iv) the warranty

period on your original Product has expired

or has not been sufficiently validated with a

copy of the proof of purchase (bill of sale).

The replacement Machine you receive (even

if refurbished or remanufactured) will be

IMPLIED,

INCLUDING

IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR

PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.

• This Limited Warranty is the only warranty

that Brother is giving for this Product. It is

the final expression and the exclusive and

only statement of Brother's obligations to

you. It replaces all other agreements and

understandings that you may have with

Brother or its representatives.

• This warranty gives you certain rights and

you may also have other rights that may

vary from state to state.

• This Limited Warranty (and Brother's

obligation to you) may not be changed in

any way unless you and Brother sign the

same piece of paper in which we (1) refer

to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)

describe the change to this warranty and

(3) agree to make that change.

Important: We recommend that you keep all

original packing materials, in the event that

you ship this product.

MFC LIMITED WARRANTY (USA)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER/FACSIMILE MACHINE

LIMITED WARRANTY

(Canada only)

Pursuant to this limited warranty of 1 year from the date of purchase for labour and parts,

Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its Authorized Service

Centers, will repair this MFC/Facsimile machine free of charge if defective in material or

workmanship. This Limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables

(including, without limitation, print cartridges, print head, toner and drum) or damage

caused by accident, neglect, misuse or improper installation or operation, any damage

caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or tampering by anyone other than a

Brother Authorized Service Representative, or from the use of supplies or consumable

items that are non-Brother products. Operation of the MFC/Facsimile machine in excess

of the specifications or with the Serial Number or Rating Label removed shall be deemed

abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end-user/purchaser. In

order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Facsimile machine must be delivered or

shipped freight prepaid by the end user/purchaser to a “Brother” Authorized Service

Center, together with your Proof of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.

For laser products: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit on

applicable models) during shipping willcause severe damage to the MFC/Facsimile and

will VOID the Warranty. (Refer to your Operation Manual for proper packaging.)

For ink-jet products: Do not remove the ink cartridges during shipping. Damage to your

print head resulting from packing without the ink cartridges will VOID your warranty.

(Refer to your Operation Manual for proper packaging.)

BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO

THE EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY

WAIVED.

No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its

Authorized Service Centers, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create

another warranty or modify this warranty. This warranty states Brother’s entire liability

and your exclusive remedy against Brother for any failure of the MFC/Facsimile machine

to operate properly.

Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of

this MFC/Facsimile machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special,

consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages, including lost profits, arising from the

use of or inability to use the product, even if advised by the end user/purchaser of the

possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do not allow the above limitation of

liability, such limitation may not apply to you.

This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights

which vary from Providence to Providence.

Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized Service Centers throughout

Canada. For Technical Support or for the name and location of your nearest Authorized

Service Center call 1-877-BROTHER. Within Montreal, please call (514) 685-6464.

Internet support: support@brother.ca or browse

Brother’s Web Site: www.brother.com

Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.

1 Rue Hôtel de Ville

Dollard-Des-Ormeaux, QC H9B 3H6

LIMITED WARRANTY (CANADA)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety precautions

To use the MFC safely

Save these instructions for later reference.

WARNING

There are high voltage

Do nothandle the plug with wet

hands. Doing this might cause

an electrical shock.

electrodes inside the MFC.

Before you clean the MFC or

clear a paper jam, make sure

you have unplugged thepower

cord from the power outlet.

After you use the MFC, some internal parts are extremely HOT!

To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the area shown in

the illustration.

To prevent injuries, be careful

not to put your hands on the

edge of the MFC under the

document cover.

To prevent injuries, be careful

not to put your fingers in the

area shown in the illustration.

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To prevent injuries, be careful not to put

your fingers in the area shown in the

illustration.

WARNING

■ When you move the MFC, grasp the side handholds that are under the

scanner. Do NOT carry the MFC by holding it at the bottom.

■ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch

telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone

line has been disconnected at the wall jack. Never install telephone

wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone jack in a wet

location unless the jack is specifically designed for a wet location.

■ Install equipment with a power cord near a socket/outlet that is easily

accessible.

■ To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger

telecommunication line cord.

■ Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of gas leak to report leak.

■ Do not use this product near appliances that use water, in a wet

basement or near a swimming pool.

■ Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical

storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

Caution

■ Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend

that you use aquality surge protection deviceon the AC power line and

on the telephone line, or unplug the lines during a lightning storm.

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Choosing a location

Place your MFC on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration and

shocks, such as a desk. Put the MFC near a telephone jack and a

standard, grounded power outlet. Choose a location where the

temperature remains between 50°F and 95.5°F (10°-32.5°C).

Caution

■ Avoid placing your MFC in a high-traffic area.

■ Do not place near heaters, air conditioners, water, chemicals, or

refrigerators.

■ Do not expose the MFC to direct sunlight, excessive heat,

moisture, or dust.

■ Do not connect your MFC to electrical outlets controlled by wall

switches or automatic timers.

■ Disruption of power can wipe out information in the MFC’s

memory.

■ Do not connect your MFC to electrical outlets on the same circuit

as large appliances or other Equipment that might disrupt the

power supply.

■ Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units

of cordless phones.

NO ! NO ! NO !

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quick Reference Guide

Press 1 if you want to

choose more settings and

the LCD will return to the

Setup send menu.

Sending faxes

Automatic Transmission

If it is not illuminated in

—OR—

green, press

(Fax).

Press 2 to fax.

Enter the fax number.

Press Start.

Place the original face up in

the ADF, or face down on

the scanner glass.

Enter the fax number using

One-Touch, Speed-Dial,

Search or the dial pad.

Receiving faxes

Select Receive Mode

Press Start.

If you are using the scanner

glass, press 2 or Start.

Press Menu, 0,1.

Press or

to select

Fax Only, Manual,

Fax/Teland External

TADand then press Set.

Real Time Transmission

You can send faxes in real time.

If it is not illuminated in

Storing numbers

green, press

(Fax).

Storing One-Touch Dial

numbers

Place the original face up in

the ADF, or face down on

the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Press the One-Touch key

where you want to store the

number.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.

Press

to select

Enter a number (up to 20

digits), and then press Set.

Enter a name (or leave it

blank), and then press Set.

On, and then press Set

—OR—

For the next transmission

only, press

select Next Fax Only,

and then press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

For the next fax only, press

or to select Next

Fax:On, and then press Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing Speed-Dial numbers

Making copies

Single copy

Press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

Enter a three-digit

Speed-Dial number, and

then press Set.

Press

(Copy) to

illuminate it in green.

Place the original face up in

the ADF, or face down on

the scanner glass.

Enter a number (up to 20

digits), and then press Set.

Enter a name (or leave it

blank), and then press Set.

Press Start.

Press Stop/Exit.

Sorting multiple copies

(Using the ADF)

Dialing operations

One-Touch Dialing /

Speed-Dialing

Press

(Copy) to

illuminate it in green.

Place the original face up in

the ADF.

Use the dialpad to enter the

number of copies you want

(up to 99).

If it is not illuminated in

green, press

(Fax).

Place the original face up in

the ADF, or face down on

the scanner glass.

Press the One-Touch key of

the number you want to call

Press Sort.

Sort

LCD.

icon appears on the

—OR—

Press Start.

Press Search/Speed Dial

press#, and then pressthe

three-digit Speed-Dial number.

Brother fax back system:

In USA: 1-800-521-2846

Brother Global Web Site:

http://www.brother.com

Press Start.

Using Search

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

and Product Support

http://solutions.brother.com

If it is not illuminated in

green, press (Fax).

Press Search/Speed Dial

and then enter the first letter

of the name you’re looking for.

Brother Accessories & Supplies:

In USA: 1-888-879-3232 (voice)

1-800-947-1445 (fax)

http://www.brothermall.com

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER (voice)

Press

search the memory.

Press Start.

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of contens

Introduction ..........................................................................1 -1

Using this Guide ...............................................................1-1

Finding information.................................................1-1

Symbols used in this Guide....................................1-1

Fax Test Sheet and Product Registration (USA only) 1-2

On-Line Registration (USA and Canada) ...................1-2

MFC part names and operations ................................1-3

Control panel overview .....................................................1-6

Status LED indications ............................................. 1-11

A b o u t f a x machines ........................................................1 -13

Custom features ....................................................... 1-13

Do you have Voice Mail on the phone line?......... 1-13

W h y should there be problems?........................... 1-13

How can you avoid possible problems ?...............1 -13

Fax tones and handshake ........................................ 1-14

E C M (Error Correction Mode)...................................1 -15

Connecting the MFC....................................................... 1-15

Connecting an external telephone............................ 1-15

Connecting an external telephone answering device

(T A D ).................................................................... 1-16

Sequenc e .............................................................1 -16

Connections .........................................................1 -18

Recording outgoing message (OGM) on an external

T A D ..................................................................1 -18

S p ecial line considerations .......................................1 -19

Roll-over phone lines............................................1 -19

Two-line phone system ........................................ 1-19

Converting telephone wall outlets ........................1 -20

Installing MFC, external two-line tad and two-line

telephone.......................................................... 1-21

Multi-line connections (PBX) .................................... 1-22

If you are installing the MFC to work with a PB X . 1 -22

Custom features on your phone line.........................1 -22

P a per .....................................................................................2-1

A b o u t p a p e r ......................................................................2 -1

Type and size of paper ...............................................2 -1

Choosing acceptable paper ..............................................2-2

Paper capacity of the paper trays...........................2-3

Paper specifications for each paper tra y ................2 -4

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to load paper.......................................................2 -5

To l oad paper or other media in the paper tray ......2 -5

To load paper or other media in the manual feed tray

(For MFC-8420) ..................................................2 -7

To load paper or other media in the

multi-purpose tray (MP tray)

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN) ................. 2-8

To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and print

op e rations

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)...................2-10

On-screen pro g r a mming ..................................................... 3 -1

User-friendly programmin g ...............................................3 -1

Menu table.................................................................. 3-1

Memory Storag e ......................................................... 3 -1

Navigation keys ................................................................3 -2

Getting started .....................................................................4 -1

In i t i a l Setup....................................................................... 4-1

Setting the Date and Time..........................................4 -1

Setting the Station ID..................................................4 -2

En t e ring text ...........................................................4 -3

Inser t i n g spaces ..................................................... 4-3

M a k i n g corrections ................................................. 4-3

R e p e a ting letters .................................................... 4-3

Sp e cial characters and symbols ............................4 -4

Setting Tone and Pulse dialing mode

(For Canada only)...................................................4 -4

General Setup................................................................... 4-5

Setting the Mode T i mer ..............................................4 -5

Setting the Paper Type...............................................4 -5

Setting the Paper Size................................................ 4-6

Setting the Ring Volum e .............................................4 -8

Setting the Beeper Volume.........................................4 -8

Setting the Speaker Volume....................................... 4-9

Turning on Automatic Daylight Savings Time............. 4-9

Toner Sav e .................................................................4 -9

Sleep Time................................................................4 -10

Turning off the Scanner Lam p ..................................4-10

Setting the Tray Use for Copy mod e ........................4 -11

Setting the Tray Use for Fax mode...........................4-12

Setting the LCD Contrast..........................................4 -12

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e tup Receive ......................................................................5 -1

B a sic receiving operation s ................................................5 -1

Choosing the Receive Mode ......................................5 -1

To select or change your Receive Mode................5 -2

S e tting the Ring Delay ...............................................5 -2

S e tting the F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)..........5 -3

E a sy Receive .............................................................5 -4

Printing a reduced incoming fax

(Au t o R e d u c t i o n ) ....................................................5 -5

P r in t i n g a fax from the memory ..................................5 -5

S e tting the Print Density .............................................5-6

A d vanced receiving operations ........................................5-7

Operation from extension telephones.........................5 -7

For FAX/TEL mode only .............................................5-7

Using a cordless external handset .............................5 -8

Changing the remote codes .......................................5 -8

P o llin g .........................................................................5-9

Setting up Polling Receive .....................................5-9

Setting up Sequential Polling Receive .................5 -10

Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode

(F o r M FC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)................... 5-10

Te l e p h o n e se r vices ........................................................5 -11

Distinctive Rin g .........................................................5 -11

What does your telephone company’s ‘Distinctive

R i ng’ do ?.......................................................... 5-11

W h a t d o e s B r o ther ’s ‘D istinctive Ring’ do ?.......... 5-11

Do you have Voice Mail?......................................5 -12

Before you choose the ring pattern to register ..... 5-12

Registering the Distinctive Ring pattern ................... 5-13

Turning off the Distinctive Rin g ............................ 5-13

Caller ID ..........................................................................5 -14

V i e w i n g Ca l l er ID List ...............................................5 -15

Clearing a Caller ID stored in the memory ...............5 -15

P r in t i n g C a l l e r ID Lis t ................................................5 -15

S e tup Send ...........................................................................6 -1

How to Fax .......................................................................6-1

E n ter Fax mode ..........................................................6-1

Fax i n g f r o m the automatic document feeder (ADF) ...6 -1

Faxing from the ADF ..............................................6-2

Fax i n g f r o m the scanner glass ...................................6-3

Fax i n g legal s i ze originals from the scanner glass .....6-4

Out of Memory messag e ........................................6-4

Manual transmission...................................................6 -4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Automatic transmission...............................................6 -5

T h is is the easiest way to send a fax...................... 6-5

Sending a fax at the end of a conversatio n ................ 6 -5

Basic sending operations..................................................6 -6

Sending faxes using multiple setting s ......................... 6 -6

Contras t ...................................................................... 6 -6

Fax Resolution............................................................6 -7

Manual and automatic fax Redial ............................... 6-8

Dual Access ...............................................................6 -9

Real T i me T r ansm i ssio n ...........................................6-10

Checking job status ..................................................6 -11

Canceling a job while scanning the original..............6 -11

Canceling a scheduled job........................................6-11

Advanced sending operations ........................................6-12

Composing the electronic Cover Pag e .....................6-12

C o m p o sing your own comments ..........................6-13

C o ver page for the next fax only...........................6-14

Se n d a cover page for all faxe s ............................6 -15

Using a printed cover page.......................................6-15

Broadcasting.............................................................6-16

Overseas Mod e ........................................................6 -18

Delayed Fax..............................................................6-19

Delayed Batch Transmission....................................6-20

Setting up Polled Transmissio n ................................6 -21

Memory Security.......................................................6 -22

Se t t ing up the passwor d .......................................6-22

T u rning Memory Security on ................................6 -23

Turning Memory Security off.....................................6 -23

Auto Dial numbers and dialing o p t ions .............................7 -1

Storing numbers for easy dialin g ......................................7 -1

Storing One-Touch Dial number s ............................... 7 -1

Storing Speed-Dial number s ....................................... 7 -2

Changing One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers.........7 -3

Setting up Groups for Broadcasting............................7 -4

D i a l i n g o p t i o n s .................................................................. 7 -5

Searc h ........................................................................ 7 -5

One-Touch Dialing......................................................7 -5

Speed-Dialin g ............................................................. 7 -6

Manual dialing............................................................. 7-6

Using an external telephone....................................... 7-6

Access codes and credit card numbers...................... 7-7

Pause .........................................................................7 -8

Tone or Pulse (Canada only)......................................7 -8

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Re m o t e Fax Options ............................................................8 -1

Fax Forwarding/Paging ....................................................8 -1

P r o g ramming a Fax Forwarding number....................8 -1

P r o g ramming your pager number...............................8-2

S e tting Fax Storag e ..........................................................8-3

S e tting your Remote Access Cod e ...................................8-4

Remote Retr i e val ..............................................................8-5

Using your Remote Access Cod e ...............................8-5

Remote commands ....................................................8 -6

Retrieving fax messages ............................................8-7

Changing your Fax Forwarding number .....................8 -7

Printing reports ....................................................................9-1

MFC settings and activity .................................................9-1

Customizing the Transmission Verification Repor t .....9-1

S e tting the Fax Activity Report Interval ......................9-2

P r in t i n g r e p o r ts ...........................................................9-3

To pr i n t a repor t ......................................................9-3

Making copies .................................................................... 10-1

Using the MFC as a copier ............................................. 10-1

E n ter Copy mode...................................................... 10-1

Temporary copy setting s ......................................1 0 -2

Making a single copy from the ADF..........................1 0 -3

Making multiple copies from the ADF....................... 10-3

S i n g le or multiple copies using the scanner glas s .... 10-4

Out of Memory message ..........................................1 0 -5

Using the copy keys (Temporary settings) .....................1 0 -6

E n large/Reduc e ........................................................1 0 -7

Quality (type of orig i n a l)............................................1 0 -8

S o rting copies using the ADF ...................................1 0 -9

Contras t .................................................................... 10-9

Tray Select ............................................................. 10-10

Duplex/N in 1 ..........................................................1 0 -11

Duplex/N in 1 copy .................................................1 0 -12

N in 1 copy ......................................................... 10-12

Poster ................................................................. 1 0 -13

Duplex (1 in 1)

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN).............1 0 -13

Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1)

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN).............1 0 -15

Changing the default copy settings .............................. 10-16

Quality ....................................................................1 0 -16

Contras t .................................................................. 1 0 -16

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the MFC as a printer ...............................................1 1 -1

Using the Brother MFC-8420, MFC-8820D or MFC-8820DN

p r inter driver.................................................................1 1 -1

How to print your document............................................11-2

Simultaneous printing and faxing....................................11-3

Two-sided printing (Duplex Printing).........................11-3

Automatic Duplex Printing (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN) ..................................................1 1 -3

M a n u a l Duplex Printing ........................................11-4

Face-down output tray..............................................1 1 -4

Printing on plain paper..............................................1 1 -5

T h e m a n u a l feed tray (For MFC-8420).................11-5

The MP tray

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN) ...............1 1 -6

Printing on thicker paper and card stock ..................11-7

T h e m a n u a l feed tray (For MFC-8420).................11-7

The multi-purpose tray (MP tray)

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN) ...............1 1 -9

Printing on enve l o p e s ............................................. 11-11

Printer operation key s ...................................................1 1 -16

Job Cancel.............................................................. 11-16

Secure key.............................................................. 11-16

Setting the Emulation Selection.............................. 11-17

Printing the Internal Font List..................................1 1 -18

Printing the Print Configuration Lis t ........................1 1 -18

Restoring factory default setting s ........................... 11-18

Pr i n t er driver settings ........................................................1 2 -1

Printer driver settings......................................................12-1

How to access the printer driver settings........................1 2 -1

Features in the Brother Native Driver.............................1 2 -2

Basic tab...................................................................12-2

Pa p e r Size............................................................1 2 -3

M u l t i p le P a g e ........................................................1 2 -3

Orientation............................................................1 2 -3

C o p ies ..................................................................12-4

M e d ia Type ...........................................................1 2 -4

Advanced tab............................................................1 2 -5

Print Qualit y ..........................................................12-5

D u p lex Printin g .....................................................12-7

W a termar k ............................................................1 2 -8

Pa g e S e t t i n g .......................................................1 2 -10

D e vice Options ...................................................1 2 -11

Secure Prin t ............................................................1 2 -11

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessories ta b ..................................................1 2 -15

Support tab......................................................... 12-16

Features in the PS printer driver

(For Window s^®) ......................................................... 1 2 -17

P o rts tab ................................................................. 12-17

Device Settings ta b .................................................1 2 -18

L a yout ta b ...............................................................1 2 -19

P a p e r / Quality ta b ..................................................1 2 -20

A d vanced Options ..................................................1 2 -21

How to scan u s ing Windows^®..........................................1 3 -1

Scanning a document ....................................................1 3 -1

TWAIN compliant...................................................... 13-1

How to access the Scanner ......................................1 3 -2

Scanning a document into the PC ............................ 13-3

Scanning a whole pag e ........................................ 13-3

PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan.. 13-4

S e ttings in the Scanner window ............................... 13-6

Image Type .......................................................... 13-6

Resolution ............................................................1 3 -6

Scan Type ............................................................1 3 -7

Brightness ............................................................1 3 -7

Contrast................................................................ 13-7

Document Siz e .....................................................1 3 -8

Scanning a document (For Windows^®XP on ly) ........... 13-10

WIA compliant ........................................................ 13-10

How to access the scanner ....................................1 3 -10

Scanning a document into the PC .......................... 13-11

Scanning a document using the ADF................. 13-11

PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan using

the scanner glas s ........................................... 1 3 -13

Bro t h er S canner Utility ....................................... 13-15

Using the scan key (For USB or Parallel interface cable

users).........................................................................1 3 -16

Scan to E-mail ........................................................ 13-17

Scan to Image ........................................................ 13-17

Scan to OCR ..........................................................1 3 -18

Scan to File............................................................. 13-18

Using ScanSoft^®Pa p e rPort^®an d Tex t B ridge^®OCR....1 3 -19

V i e w i n g items ......................................................... 13-20

Organizing your items in folders ............................. 13-21

Quick l i n ks to other appl i c a tions ............................. 13-21

ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®OCR lets you convert image text

into text you can edit ..........................................1 3 -22

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can I m p o rt items from other applications ........ 13-22

You can Export items in other formats....................1 3 -23

Expor t i n g a n i m age file....................................... 13-23

How to Uninstall PaperPort^®and ScanSoft^®

T e xtBridge^®........................................................1 3 -24

Using the Brother Control Center for Windows^®

9 5 /98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and

Windows NT^®WS 4.0 .........................................................14-1

Bro t h er MFL-Pro Control Center...............................14-1

AutoLoad the Brother Control Center.......................1 4 -2

How to turn o f f A utoLoad..........................................1 4 -2

Bro t h er Control Center feature s ......................................1 4 -3

Auto Configuratio n ....................................................14-3

Scan key operation s .................................................14-4

Copy operation s ........................................................1 4 -4

PC-Fax operation......................................................14-4

Scanner settings for Scan, Copy and

PC-Fax buttons.....................................................14-5

Global setting s ..........................................................14-5

Setting up the scanner configurations ......................14-6

Perform an operation from the

C o n trol Center scree n ..........................................1 4 -7

Scan to File.....................................................................1 4 -8

To access Scan to File Configurations scree n .........14-8

Scanner settings.......................................................1 4 -8

Destination folder......................................................14-9

Scan to E -m ail .............................................................. 14-10

To access Scan to E-mail Configurations screen... 14-10

Scanner settings..................................................... 14-10

E-mail application ...................................................1 4 -11

Send to Op t i o n s...................................................... 14-11

Scan to OCR (Word Processor) ................................... 14-12

To access Scan to OCR Configurations scree n .....1 4 -12

Scanner settings..................................................... 14-12

W o rd P r o cessor...................................................... 14-13

Scan to Image............................................................... 14-14

To access Scan to Image Configurations scree n ... 14-14

Scanner Settings ....................................................1 4 -14

Target Application...................................................1 4 -14

Copy ............................................................................. 14-15

To access the Copy Configurations screen............ 14-15

Scanner settings..................................................... 14-15

Number of copies....................................................1 4 -15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S e nd a fax ....................................................................1 4 -16

To access the Send a fax Configurations scree n ... 1 4 -16

Scanner setting s ..................................................... 1 4 -16

P C -FAX Settings .................................................... 14-17

Using the Win d o ws^®-B a s e d Brother SmartUI

Control Center .................................................................... 15-1

B r o ther SmartUI Control Center ..................................... 15-1

A u toLoad the Bro t h e r Control Center ....................... 15-2

How to turn off Auto Load......................................... 15-2

B r o ther Control Center features ..................................... 15-3

A u to Configuratio n ....................................................1 5 -4

Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button

configuration................................................................ 15-5

Scan to E-mail .......................................................... 15-6

Scan to File............................................................... 15-7

Scan to Image .......................................................... 15-8

Scan to OCR ..........................................................1 5 -10

S o ftware Section ..........................................................1 5 -12

Scan ....................................................................... 15-13

Copy ....................................................................... 15-13

Fa x .......................................................................... 1 5 -14

Custom ...................................................................1 5 -14

Scan to Fil e ...................................................................1 5 -15

Scan to E-mail .............................................................. 15-17

File attachments ..................................................... 15-19

Scanner setting s ..................................................... 1 5 -20

Scan to OCR (Word Processing program) ...................1 5 -21

Scan to Graphics application

(e xample: M i crosoft Paint).........................................1 5 -23

Copy ....................................................................... 15-25

Fax sett i n g (P C -Fax using the Brother Fax Driver) ...... 15-27

FAX se t t ings ...........................................................1 5 -28

Custom: User-defined button s ...................................... 1 5 -30

Customizing a user-defined butto n ......................... 1 5 -30

1. S e l e ct the Scan Actio n ................................... 1 5 -30

2. S e l e ct Configuration for the Scan Type..........1 5 -31

3. S e l e ct Scan Settings. .....................................1 5 -35

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using MFC Remote Setup .................................................16-1

M F C R e m o te Setup........................................................1 6 -1

Using Brother PC-FAX software .......................................17-1

PC-FAX sendin g .............................................................17-1

Setting up user information.......................................17-2

Sending setup...........................................................1 7 -3

Outside line acces s ...................................................1 7 -4

Include header..........................................................17-4

Address Book file......................................................17-4

User interfac e ...........................................................1 7 -5

Simple styl e ..........................................................17-5

F a csimile styl e ......................................................17-5

Speed-Dial setu p ............................................................1 7 -6

The Address Book ....................................................17-7

Setting up a Member in the Address Book...............1 7 -8

Setting up a Group for Broadcastin g ........................1 7 -9

Edi t i n g M e m b e r in f o rmation.................................... 17-10

Deleting a Member or Grou p ..................................1 7 -10

Exporting the Address Boo k ................................... 17-10

Importing to the Address Boo k ............................... 17-12

Setting up a Cover Page.........................................1 7 -13

You can enter information in each fiel d .................. 17-14

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the

F a csimile styl e ....................................................1 7 -15

R e d ial .................................................................1 7 -16

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style 17-16

Setting up PC-FAX receiving

(Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and

Windows N T^®WS 4.0 o n ly)....................................... 17-18

Running PC-FAX Receivin g ................................... 17-18

Setting up your PC..................................................1 7 -18

Viewing new PC-FAX message s ............................1 7 -19

Receiving a fax into the PC

(W i n d o w s^®XP only)...................................................1 7 -20

How to receive a fax au t o maticall y .........................1 7 -20

How to view the received faxe s .............................. 17-25

Using your M F C w i th a Macintosh^®..................................18-1

Setting up your USB-equipped Apple^®Ma cintosh^®.......18-1

Using the Brother printer driver with your Apple^®Macintosh^®

(Mac OS 8.6-9.2) .........................................................18-2

Using the Brother Printer Driver withYour Apple^®Macintosh^®

(Mac OS X) ..................................................................18-5

xxii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Choosing page setup options ...................................1 8 -5

S p ecific setting s ........................................................1 8 -6

Using the PS driver with your Apple^®Macintosh^®.......... 18-8

For Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2 users .................................... 18-8

For Mac OS X users ............................................... 18-12

S e n d ing a fax f r o m your Macintosh^®ap p licatio n ..........1 8 -15

For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users ...................................... 18-15

For Mac OS X users ............................................... 18-17

Drag a vCard from the Mac^®OS X Address Book

ap p l i c a tio n ......................................................1 8 -19

Using the Brother TWAIN scanner driver with your

M a cintosh^®................................................................1 8 -21

Accessing the scanner ........................................... 18-21

Scanning an image into your Macintosh^®...............1 8 -22

Scanning a whole pag e ...................................... 1 8 -22

P r e Scanning an image ........................................... 18-23

S e ttings in the Scanner window ............................. 18-24

Image ................................................................. 18-24

Scanning Area.................................................... 18-26

Business Card Size............................................ 1 8 -26

Adjusting the Image............................................ 18-27

Using Presto!^®Pa g e Manager^®.....................................1 8 -28

High l i ght s ................................................................1 8 -28

System requirement s ..............................................1 8 -29

Technical Support...................................................1 8 -29

MFC Remote Setup (Mac OS X) .................................. 18-30

Network Scanning

(Wind ows^®98 /98SE/Me/2000 Professional

and XP only) .......................................................................19-1

Registering your PC with the MFC ........................... 19-1

Using the Scan ke y .........................................................1 9 -4

Scan to E-mail (PC).................................................. 19-4

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)..................................1 9 -5

Scan to Image .......................................................... 19-6

Scan to OCR ............................................................1 9 -7

Scan to File............................................................... 19-8

Brother Network PC-FAX s o f tware ..................................2 0 -1

E n a b le Network PC-FAX ..........................................2 0 -1

Sending setup ...................................................... 20-1

Extra options in Address Book .............................2 0 -3

Insta l l ing Network PC-FAX .......................................2 0 -4

Window s^®95 /98 /9 8 S E a n d Me users .................. 20-4

xxiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Brother Network PC-FAX software...........2 0 -5

Quick Tips:............................................................2 0 -5

Sending a Network PC-FAX from your Macintosh^®

ap p l i c a tio n ............................................................2 0 -6

F o r M a c OS 8.6-9.2 users ....................................20-6

F o r M a c OS X user s .............................................20-6

Important information ........................................................2 1 -1

Standard telephone and FCC Notices

T h e se notices are in effect on models sold and used

only in the United States.......................................21-1

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) Declaration

of Conformity (USA only)......................................2 1 -3

Im p o rtant ..............................................................21-4

Im p o rtant – about the interface cable...................2 1 -4

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

(Canada only).......................................................2 1 -4

International ENERGY STAR^®Compliance

Statement .............................................................21-4

L a ser safet y ..............................................................21-4

FDA regulations........................................................2 1 -5

Important safety instruction s ...........................................21-6

Trademarks.....................................................................2 1 -8

Troublesh o o ting and routine maintenance .....................22-1

Troubleshooting .............................................................22-1

Error message s ........................................................2 2 -1

Original jam s .............................................................22-4

Original is jammed in the top of the ADF unit.......2 2 -4

Original is jammed inside the ADF unit. ...............2 2 -5

Paper jam s ................................................................2 2 -6

Paper is jammed in the duplex tray (For MFC-8820D

a n d MFC-8820DN) .........................................2 2 -11

If you are having difficulty with your MFC...............2 2 -13

Improving the print qualit y ....................................... 22-18

Packing and shipping the MFC.....................................2 2 -22

Routine maintenance....................................................2 2 -25

C l e a n ing the scanner..............................................2 2 -25

C l e a n ing the printer ................................................ 22-26

C l e a n ing the drum unit............................................ 22-27

Replacing the toner cartridge..................................2 2 -28

xxiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to replace the toner cartridge ......................... 22-29

Replacing the drum unit..........................................2 2 -34

Checking the drum life............................................ 22-37

P a ge Counter ......................................................... 22-37

Optional accesso r i es .........................................................2 3 -1

Memory board ................................................................ 23-1

Insta l l ing the optional memory boar d ........................2 3 -2

Net w o rk (L AN) boar d ...................................................... 23-4

B e fore star t i n g installat i o n ........................................ 23-5

Step 1: Hardware installation.................................... 23-5

Step 2: Connecting the NC-9100h to an Unshielded

Tw i s t e d Pair 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Ethernet

Network................................................................ 23-8

L E D ......................................................................2 3 -8

TEST SW I T C H.....................................................2 3 -9

P a p e r T r a y #2........................................................... 23-9

G l ossary .............................................................................. G-1

S p e c i f i c a tions ......................................................................S-1

P r o d u ct descr i p tio n ...........................................................S -1

General .............................................................................S-1

P r int media .......................................................................S -2

Copy .................................................................................S-2

Fa x ....................................................................................S-3

Scanner ............................................................................S-4

P r in t e r ...............................................................................S-5

Interface s ..........................................................................S-5

Computer requirement s ....................................................S-6

Consumable item s ............................................................S-7

Net w o rk (L AN) board (NC-9100h) ....................................S-8

Index ......................................................................................I -1

Re m o t e Retrieval Access card .......................................... R-1

xxv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Using this Guide

Thank you for buying a Brother Multi-Function Center (MFC). Your

MFC-8420, MFC-8820D or MFC-8820DN is simple to use, with LCD

screen instructions to guide you through programming it. You can

make the most of your MFC by taking a few minutes to read this Guide.

Finding information

All the chapter headings and subheadings are listed in the Table of

Contents. You will be able to find information about a specific feature

or operation by checking the Index at the back of this Guide.

Symbols used in this Guide

Throughout this Guide you’ll see special symbols alerting you to

important warnings, notes and actions. To make things clearer and

to help you press the correct keys, we used special fonts and added

some of the messages that will appear in the LCD.

Bold

Bold typeface identifies specific keys on the MFC

control panel.

Italics

Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point

or refers you to a related topic.

Courier

New

Courier New typeface identifies the messages on

the LCD of the MFC.

Warnings inform you what to do to avoid possible personal

injury.

Cautions specify procedures you must follow or avoid to

prevent possible damage to the machine.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or

give tips about how the current operation works with other features.

Improper Setup alertsyou to devices and operations that are not

compatible with the MFC.

1 - 1 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax Test Sheet and Product Registration

(USA only)

After setting your Station ID, please fill in the Test Sheet included

with your MFC and fax it to Brother’s Automated Fax Response

System as your first transmission. This will check that your MFC is

working properly.

To get a response, you must have set up your Station ID.

(See Setting the Station ID on page 4-2.)

In USA Only: 1-877-268-9575

When your Test Sheet is received, a Confirmation Sheet and

Product Registration form will be sent back to your MFC.

Please fill in the form and return it to complete your registration.

On-Line Registration (USA and Canada)

Insert the MFL-Pro Suite CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

Click Online Registration to register your product.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MFC part names and operations

■ Front view

5 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

6 ADF Document Support

Extension

4 Cont rol Panel

7 ADFDocument

Output Support

Flap

Face-down Output Tray

Support Flapwith Extension

8 Document Cover

2 Front Cover Release Button

(MFC-8420) Manual Feed Tray

(MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

Multi-purpose Tray

9 Power Switch

10 Front Cover

(MP Tray)

11 Paper Tray (Tray #1)

No. Name

Description

(MFC-8420) Manual Feed Tray

Load paper here.

(MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

Multi-purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Front Cover Release Button

Press it to open the front cover.

Face-down OutputTray Support Flap Unfold it to prevent the printed paper

with Extension (Support Flap)

from sliding off the MFC.

Control Panel

Use the keys and display to control

the MFC.

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

ADF Document Support Extension

Use the ADF unit for multiple page

originals.

Place the original here to use the

ADF unit.

ADF Document Output Support Flap Unfold to prevent the scanned pages

from sliding off the MFC.

Document Cover

Open to place the original on the

scanner glass.

Power Switch

Switch it on or off.

10 Front Cover

Open to install a toner cartridge or

drum unit.

11 Paper Tray (Tray #1)

Load paper here.

1 - 3 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ Back view

16 ADF Cover

15 Face-up Output Tray

(Back Output Tray)

17 Telephone Line Jack

14 AC Power Connector

18 USB Interface

Connector

13 Duplex Tray

(MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

19 Parallel Interface

Connector

20 External Telephone

Line Jack

12 Paper Adjustment Lever

for Duplex Printing

(MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

No. Name

Description

12 Paper Adjustment Lever for

Use to match your paper size for duplex

printing.

Duplex Printing

(MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

13 Duplex Tray

Slide out to remove paper jammed inside the

MFC.

(MFC-8820Dand

MFC-8820DN)

14 AC Power Connector

Connect the AC Power Connector here.

15 Face-up Output Tray

Open it when thicker paper is placed in the

MP tray or Manual feed tray.

(Back Output Tray)

16 ADF Cover

Open to remove paper jammed inside the

ADF unit.

17 Telephone Line Jack

Plug the line cord supplied with the MFCinto

here.

18 USB Interface Connector

Connect the USB Cable here.

Connect the Parallel Cable here.

19 Parallel Interface Connector

20 External Telephone Line Jack Plug in the modular plug on the external

telephone line here.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ Inside view (Document cover open)

24 Document Cover

25White Film

23Scanner Lock Lever

22 Glass Strip

21 Document

Guidelines

26Scanner Glass

No. Name

Description

21 Document Guidelines

22 Glass Strip

Use to center the original on the scanner glass.

This is used to scan the original when using the

ADF.

23 Scanner Lock Lever

Use to lock/unlockthe scannerwhen relocatingthe

MFC.

24 Document Cover

25 White Film

Open to place the original on the scanner glass.

Clean it for good quality copying and scanning.

Place the original to be scanned here.

26 Scanner Glass

1 - 5 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel overview

MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN have similar control

panel keys.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shift

Status LED

To access memory locations 21

through 40 in the One-Touch keys

hold down the Shift key.

(Light-Emitting Diode)

The LED willflash and change color

depending on the MFC status.

One-Touch keys

5-Line Liquid Crystal Display

(LCD)

These 20 keys give you instant

access to 40 previously stored dial

numbers.

Displays messageson thescreen to

help you to set up and use your

MFC.

Print keys:

Secure

Lets you print out data saved in

memory by entering your four-digit

password.

Job cancel

Clears data from the printer

memory.

1 - 7 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode keys:

Fax

Lets you access Fax mode.

Copy

Lets you access Copy mode.

Scan

Lets you access Scan mode.

Fax and telephone keys:

Hook

Press before dialing if you want to

make sure a fax machine will

answer, and then press Start.

Resolution

Setstheresolution whenyousend a

fax.

Search/Speed Dial

Lets you look up numbers that are

stored in the dialing memory. It also

lets you dial stored numbers by

^pressing#and a three-digit

number.

Redial/Pause

Redials the last number you called.

It also inserts a pause in auto dial

numbers.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigation keys:

Press to scroll forward or backward

to a menu selection.

Lets you access the Menu to

program.

When using the speaker or ring, you

can press these keys to adjust the

volume in fax mode.

Set

Lets you store your settings in the

MFC.

Press to scroll through the menus

and options.

Clear/Back

Also, you can use these keys to do

a numerial search for the names of

stored numbers in fax mode.

Deletes entered data or lets you exit

the menu by pressing repeatedly.

1 - 9 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy keys

Dial Pad

(Temporary settings):

Use these keys to dial telephone

and fax numbers and as a keyboard

for entering information into the

MFC.

Enlarge/Reduce

Lets you reduce or enlarge copies

depending upon the ratio you

select.

The # key lets you temporarily

switch the dialing mode during a

telephone call from Pulse to Tone.

Contrast

Lets you make a copy that is lighter

or darker than the original.

Stop/Exit

Quality

Stops a fax, copy and scan

operation or exits from the menu.

Lets you select the copy quality for

your type of original.

Start

Tray Select

Lets you start sending faxes,

making copies or scanning.

Youcanselect whichtray you would

like to use for the next copy.

Sort

Lets you sort multiple copies using

the ADF.

N in 1 (For MFC-8420)

N in 1 lets you copy 2 or 4 pages

onto one page.

Duplex/N in 1(ForMFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

You can choose Duplex to copy on

both sides of the paper or N in 1 to

copy 2 or 4 pages onto one page.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Status LED indications

The Status LED (Light Emitting Diode) will flash and change color

depending on the MFC status.

The LED indications shown in the table below are used in the

illustrations in this chapter.

LED

LED status

LED is off.

LED is on.

Green

Yellow

Red

LED is blinking.

Red

LED

MFC status

Description

Sleep Mode

The power switch is off or the MFC is in Sleep

mode.

Warming Up

Ready

The MFC is warming up for printing.

The MFC is ready to print.

Green

Receiving Data

The MFC is either receiving data from the

computer, processing data in memory or

printing data.

Yellow

Data Remaining in

Memory

Print data remains in the MFC memory.

1 - 11 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LED

MFC status

Description

Service error

Follow the steps below.

1. Turn off the power switch.

2. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it back on

and try to print again.

If you cannot clear the error and see the same

service call indication after turning the MFC

back on, please call Brother Customer Service

at: 1-800-284-4329 (in USA), 1-877-BROTHER

(in Canada) or (514) 685-6464 (in Montreal).

Red

Cover open

Toner empty

The cover is open. Close the cover. (See Error

messages on page 22-1.)

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

(See Replacing the toner cartridg e on page

22-28.)

Paper error

Put paper in the tray or clear the paper jam.

Check the LCD message. (Se e Troubleshooting

on page 22-1.)

Red

Scan lock

Others

Check that the scanner lock lever is released.

(See Scanner Lock Lever on page 1-5.)

Check the LCD message. (Se e Troubleshooting

on page 22-1.)

Out of memory

Memory is full. (See Error messages on page

22-1.)

When the power switch is off or the MFC is in Sleep mode, the

LED is off.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About fax machines

Custom features

Do you have Voice Mail on the phone line?

If you have Voice Mail on the phone line where you will install your

new MFC, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the MFC

may conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls.

Why should there be problems?

Since both the MFC and Voice Mail will pick up the call, after the

number of rings you have set, each of them has the ability to keep

the other from receiving calls.

For example, if your Voice Mail is set to answer after two rings and

your MFC is set to answer after four, your Voice Mail will stop your

MFC from receiving faxes.

If you set Voice Mail and the Brother MFC to answer after the same

number of rings, there is no way of knowing which one will answer

first. It is important to remember that neither Voice Mail nor the MFC

can pass the call back to the other after the call has been answered.

How can you avoid possible problems?

A very good way to avoid problems like the one mentioned, is to get

a second phone number on your present phone line.

Many people with Voice Mail choose an alternative service, which is

called “Distinctive Ring”, and they are very satisfied with it. (See

Distinctive Ring on page 5-11.)

Another wayto avoid possible problems is to replace your Voice Mail

with an answering machine. Your Brother MFC is designed to work

with an answering machine or TAD (telephone answering device).

(See Connecting an external telephone answering device (TAD) on

page 1-16.)

1 - 13 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax tones and handshake

When someone is sending a fax, the MFC sends fax calling tones

(CNG tones). These are quiet, intermittent beeps every 4-seconds.

You’ll hear them after you dial and pressStartand they willcontinue

for about 60 seconds after dialing. During that time, the sending

machine must begin the “handshake”, or connection, with the

receiving machine.

Each time you use automatic procedures to send a fax, you are

sending CNG tones overthe phone line. You’llsoon learn to listen for

these quiet beeps each time you answer a phone on your fax line, so

you will know if you are receiving a fax message.

The receiving fax responds with fax receiving tones, which are loud,

chirping sounds. Areceiving faxchirps for about 40 seconds over the

phone line, and the LCD shows Receiving.

If your MFC is set to the Fax Onlymode, it will answer every call

automatically with fax receiving tones. If the other person hangs up,

your MFC will continue to send the “chirps” for about 40 seconds,

and the LCD continues to show Receiving. To cancel receiving,

press Stop/Exit.

The fax ‘handshake’ is the time in which the sending machine’sCNG

tones and the receiving machines “chirps” overlap. This must be for

at least 2 to 4 seconds, so both machines can understand how each

is sending and receiving the fax. The handshake cannot begin until

the call is answered, and the CNG tones only last for about 60

seconds after the number is dialed. So it is important for the receiving

machine to answer the call in as few rings as possible.

When you have an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD)

on your faxline, yourTAD willdecide the number of rings before

the call is answered.

Pay special attention to the directions for connecting a TAD in

this chapter. (See Connecting an external telephone answering

device (TAD) on page 1-1 6.)

INTRODUCTION 1 - 14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is a way for the MFC to check a

fax transmission while it is in progress. If the MFC detects errors

during fax transmission, if resends the pages of the fax that had an

error. ECM transmissions are only possible between fax machines

that both have this feature. If they do, you may send and receive fax

messages that are continuously being checked by the MFC.

Your MFC must have enough memory for this feature to work.

Connecting the MFC

Connecting an external telephone

Although your MFC does not have a handset, you can connect a

separate telephone (or telephone answering device) directly to your

MFC as shown in the diagram below.

Connect the modular plug on the telephone’s line cord to the jack

labeled EXT. in the back of the MFC.

Whenever this phone (or TAD) is in use, the LCD shows

Telephone.

1 - 15 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting an external telephone answering

device (TAD)

Sequence

You may choose to connect an answering device. However, when

you have an external TAD on the same telephone line as the MFC,

the TAD answers all calls and the MFC “listens” for fax calling (CNG)

tones. If it hears them, the MFC takes over the call and receives the

fax. If it doesn’t hear CNG tones, the MFC lets the TAD continue

playing your outgoing message so your caller can leave you a voice

message.

The TAD must answer within four rings (the recommended setting is

two rings). The MFC cannot hear CNG tones until the TAD has

answered the call, and with four rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds

of CNG tones left for the fax “handshake”. Make sure you carefully

follow the instructions in this guide for recording your outgoing

message. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your

external answering machine if it exceeds five rings.

If you do not receive all your faxes, reduce the Ring Delay

setting on your external TAD.

If You Subscribe to your Telephone Company’s Distinctive Ring

Service:

You may connect an external TAD to a separate wall jack only

if you subscribe to your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring

service, have registered the distinctive ring pattern on your

MFC, and use that number as a fax number. The recommended

setting is four rings on the external TAD when you have the

telephone company’s Distinctive Ring Service.

If You Do Not Subscribe to Distinctive Ring Service:

You must plug your TAD into the EXT. jack of your MFC. If your

TAD is plugged into a wall jack, both your MFC and the TAD will

try to control the phone line. (See illustration on the next page.)

INTRODUCTION 1 - 16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do not connect a TAD elsewhere on the same phone line

(unless you have the Distinctive Ring service).

TAD

TA D

1 - 17 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connections

The external TAD must be plugged into the back of the MFC, into the

jack labeled EXT. Your MFC cannot work properly if you plug the

TAD into a wall jack (unless you are using Distinctive Ring).

Plug the telephone line cord from the wall jack into the back of

the MFC, in the jack labeled LINE.

Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAD into the

back of the MFC, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make sure this cord

is connected to the TAD at the TAD’s telephone line jack, and

not its telephone jack.)

Set your external TAD to four rings or less. (The MFC’s Ring

Delay setting does not apply.)

Record the outgoing message on your external TAD.

Set the TAD to answer calls.

Set the Receive Mode to External TAD.

(See Choosing the Receive Mode on page 5-1.)

Recording outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAD

Timing is important in recording this message. The message sets up

the ways to handle both manual and automatic fax reception.

Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message.

(This allows your MFC time to listen for the fax CNG tones of

automatic transmissions before they stop.)

Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

End your20-second message bygiving yourFax Receive Code

for people sending manual faxes. For example:

“After the beep, leave a message or send a fax by pressing

51 and Start.”

We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5-second

silence because the MFC cannot hear fax tones over a resonant

or loud voice. You may try omitting this pause, but if yourMFC has

trouble receiving, then you must rerecord the OGM to include it.

INTRODUCTION 1 - 18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Special line considerations

Roll-over phone lines

A roll-over phone system is a group of two or more separate

telephone lines that pass incoming calls to each other if they are

busy. The calls are usually passed down or “rolled over” to the next

available phone line in a preset order.

Your MFC can work in a roll-over system as long as it is the last

number in the sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not put the

MFC on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and

a second fax call is received, the fax call would be transferred to a

line that does not have a fax machine. Your MFC will work best on

a dedicated line.

Two-line phone system

A two-line phone system is nothing more than two separate phone

numbers on the same wall outlet. The two phone numbers can be on

separate jacks (RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your MFC

must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be

equal in size and appearance and both may contain four wires

(black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a two-line

phone and see if it can access both lines. If it can, you must separate

the line for your MFC. (S e e Easy Receive on page 5-4.)

1 - 19 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Converting telephone wall outlets

There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways

may require assistance from the telephone company. You can

change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or,

you can have an RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump one of

the phone numbers to it.

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a

triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two

separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1

and 2). If your MFC is on Line 1, plug the MFC into L1 of the triplex

adapter. If your MFC is on Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.

Triplex Adapter

RJ14

RJ11

RJ14

INTRODUCTION 1 - 20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing MFC, external two-line tad and two-line

telephone

When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering

device (TAD) and a two-line telephone, your MFC must be isolated

on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAD. The most common

connection is to put the MFC on Line 2, which is explained in the

following steps. The back of the two-line TAD must have two

telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other labeled L2.

You will need at least three telephone line cords, the one that came

with your MFC and two for your external two-line TAD. You will need

a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.

Place the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your

MFC.

Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your MFC into the L2

jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack

on the back of the MFC.

Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into

the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the L1

or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD

into the L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the

EXT. jack on the left side of the MFC.

Triplex Adapter

Two Line Phone

External Two Line TAD

MFC

You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always.

There are two ways to add a two-line telephone to the MFC’s wall

outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line

telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug

the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line TAD.

1 - 21 INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multi-line connections (PBX)

Most offices use a central telephone system. While it is often

relatively simple to connect the MFC to a key system or a PBX

(Private Branch Exchange), we suggest that you contact the

company that installed your telephone system and ask them to

connect the MFC for you. It is advisable to have a separate line for

the MFC. You can then leave the Receive Mode set to FAX Only to

receive faxes any time of the day or night.

If the MFC isto be connected to a multi-line system, ask your installer

to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the

unit from being activated each time a telephone call is received.

As with all fax units, this MFC must be connected to a two wire

system. If your line has more than two wires, proper connection

of the MFC cannot be made.

If you are installing the MFC to work with a PBX

It is not guaranteed that the unit will operate correctly under all

circumstances with a PBX. Any cases of difficulty should be

reported first to the company that handles your PBX.

If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator,

it is recommended that the Receive Mode be set to Manual. All

incoming calls should initially be regarded as telephone calls.

Custom features on your phone line

If you have Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID,Caller ID,

RingMaster, an answering service, an alarm system or other custom

feature on one phone line it may create a problem with the operation

of your MFC. (See Custom features on page 1-1 3 and Custom

features on a single line. on page 22-14.)

INTRODUCTION 1 - 22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper

About paper

Type and size of paper

The MFC loads paper from the installed papertray, manualfeed tray,

multi-purpose tray or optional lower tray.

Tray Type

Model name

Paper tray (Tray #1)

MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN

Manual feed tray

MFC-8420

Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)

Optional lower tray (Tray #2)

MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN

Option for MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN

Recommended paper

Plain Paper:

Xerox 4200DP 20 lb

Hammermill Laser Paper 24 lb

Transparency:

Labels:

3M CG 3300

Avery laser label # 5160

PAPER 2 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ Before you buy a large amount of paper, please test some to

make sure that the paper is suitable.

■ Use paper that is made for plain-paper copying.

■ Use paper that is 75 to 90 g/m²(20 to 24 lb).

■ Use neutral paper. Do not use acidic or alkaline paper.

■ Use long-grain paper.

■ Use paper with a moisture content of approximately 5%.

Caution

Do not use ink jet paper. It may cause a paper jam and damage your

MFC.

The output quality depends on the paper type and paper brand.

Visit us at http ://solutions.brother.com and check the latest

recommendations for paper that can be used with the

MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN.

Choosing acceptable paper

We recommend that you test paper (especially special sizes and

types of paper) on the MFC before purchasing large quantities.

■ Avoid feeding label sheets that are partly used or your MFC will

be damaged.

■ Avoid using coated paper, such as vinyl coated paper.

■ Avoid using preprinted or highly textured paper, or paper with an

embossed letterhead.

For optimum printing, use a recommended type of paper, especially

for plain paper and transparencies. For more information on paper

specifications, call your nearest authorized sales representative or

the place where you purchased your MFC.

■ Use label or transparencies that are designed for use in laser

printers.

■ For the best print quality, we recommend using long-grained

paper.

■ If you are using special paper and the paper has problems

feeding from the paper tray, try again using the manual feed tray

or multi-purpose tray.

■ You can use recycled paper in this MFC.

2 - 2 PAPER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper capacity of the paper trays

Paper size

Number of sheets

Multi-purpose tray

(MP tray)

Width: 69.8 to 220 mm

(2.75 to 8.66 in.)

50 sheets

(80 g/m²or 20 lb)

(MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

Height: 116 to 406.4 mm

(4.57 to 16.0 in.)

Manual feed tray

(MFC-8420)

Width: 69.8 to 220 mm

(2.75 to 8.66 in.)

Single sheet

Height: 116 to 406.4 mm

(4.57 to 16.0 in.)

Paper tray (Tray #1) A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5

250 sheets

(80 g/m²or 20 lb)

(JIS), Executive, A5, A6, B6

(ISO)

Optional lower tray A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5

250 sheets

(80 g/m²or 20 lb)

(Tray #2)

(JIS), Executive, A5, B6 (ISO)

Duplex printing

A4, Letter, Legal

—

(MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

PAPER 2 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper specifications for each paper tray

Model

MFC-8420

MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN

Paper

types

Multi-

purpose

tray

N/A

Plain paper, Bond paper,

Recycled paper,

Envelope^*1, Labels^*2, and

Transparency^*2

Manual

feed tray

Plain paper, Bond paper,

Recycled paper,

N/A

Envelope, Labels, and

Transparency

Paper tray Plain paper, Recycled paper, and Transparency^*2

Optional

Plain paper, Recycled paper, and Transparency^*2

Lower tray

Paper

weights

Multi-

purpose

tray

N/A

60 to 161 g/m²(16to 43 lb)

Manual

60 to 161 g/m²(16 to 43 lb) N/A

feed tray

Paper tray 60 to 105 g/m²(16 to 28 lb)

Optional

60 to 105 g/m²(16 to 28 lb)

Lower tray

Paper

sizes

Multi-

purpose

tray

N/A

Width: 69.8 to 220 mm

(2.75 to 8.66 in.)

Height: 116 to 406.4 mm

(4.57 to 16.0 in.)

Manual

feed tray

Width: 69.8 to 220 mm

(2.75 to 8.66 in.)

N/A

Height: 116 to 406.4 mm

(4.57 to 16.0 in.)

Paper tray A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), Executive, A5, A6,

B6 (ISO)

Optional

A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), Executive, A5, B6

Lower Tray (ISO)

*1 Up to 3 envelopes

*2 Up to 10 sheets

When printing transparencies, remove each one from the

face-down output tray after it exits the MFC.

2 - 4 PAPER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to load paper

To load paper or other media in the paper tray

Pull the paper tray completely out of the MFC.

While pressing the paper guide release lever, slide the adjusters

to fit the paper size.

Check that the guides are firmly in the slots.

For Legal size paper, press the universal guide release button

and pull out the back of the paper tray.

Universal Guide Release

Button

PAPER 2 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.

Put paper in the paper tray.

Check that the paper is flat in the tray, below the maximum

paper mark, and that the paper guide is flush against the paper

stack.

Up to here.

Put the paper tray firmly back in the MFC and unfold the support

flap before you use the MFC.

Support Flap with

Extension

When you put paper in the paper tray, please remember the

following:

■ The side to be printed on must be face down.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it

gently into the tray.

■ To copy or receive faxes on Legal size paper, unfold the

support flap extension, too.

2 - 6 PAPER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To load paper or other media in the manual feed tray

(For MFC-8420)

When printing envelopes and labels you should only use the

manual feed tray.

Open the manual feed tray. Slide the paper guides to fit the

paper size.

Using both hands put paper in the manual feed tray until the

front edge of the paper touches the paper feed roller. Hold the

paper in this position until the MFC automatically feeds the

paper in for a short distance, and then let go of the paper.

When you put paper in the manual feed tray, please remember

the following:

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it

gently into the tray.

■

Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position

on the manual feed tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed

properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.

■ Do not put more than one sheet of paper or envelope in the

manual feed tray at any one time, or it may cause a jam.

PAPER 2 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To load paper or other media in the multi-purpose tray

(MP tray) (For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

When printing envelopes and labels you should only use the

multi-purpose tray.

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Pull out and unfold the MP tray support flap.

MP tray support flap

When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the

back of the tray.

Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position

on the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,

resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.

2 - 8 PAPER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can place up to 3 envelopes or up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m²

or 20 lb paper in the MP tray.

While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper

guide to fit the paper size.

When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the

following:

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the

MFC.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it

gently into the tray.

PAPER 2 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and

print operations

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

If you want to print on both sides of the paper using the Duplex

feature for fax, copy or print, you will need to set the Paper

Adjustment Lever to the size of paper you are using.

This feature is available for A4, Letter or Legal size paper. (See

Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN) on page 5-1 0, Duplex/N in 1 on page 10-11 and

Tw o -s ided printing (Duplex Printing) on page 11-3.)

Load paper in the Paper Tray or Multi-purpose Tray.

Set the Paper Adjustment Lever for Duplex Printing, in the back

of the MFC, to match your paper size.

Letter/Legal

Your MFC is now ready to print two-sided pages.

2 - 10 PAPER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

On-screen programming

User-friendly programming

Your MFC is designed to be easy to use with LCD on-screen

programming using the navigation keys. User-friendly programming

helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your MFC

has to offer.

Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created

step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your MFC.

All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide you through

the menu selections and programming options.

Menu table

You can probably program your MFC without the User’s Guide. But

to help you understand the menu selections and options that are

found in the MFC programs, use the Menu table on page 3-4.

You can program your MFC by pressing Menu followed by the

menu numbers.

For example to set Fax Resolution to Fine:

Press Menu, 2, 2, 2 and

Press Set.

to select Fine.

Memory Storage

If there is a power failure, you will not lose your menu settings

because they are stored permanently. Temporary settings (such as

Contrast, OverseasMode, and so on) willbe lost. You may also have

to reset the date and time.

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigation keys

*Access the menu

*Go to the next menu level

*Accept an option

*Exit the menu by pressing

repeatedly

*Go back to the previous

menu level

*Scroll through the current

menu level

*Go back to the previous

menu level

*Go forward to the next

menu level

*Exit the menu

You can access the menu mode by pressing Menu.

When you enter the menu, the LCD scrolls.

Press 1 for General Setup menu

1.General Setup

2.Fax

—OR—

Press 2 for Fax menu

—OR—

3.Copy

4.Printer

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press 3 for Copy menu

—OR—

Press 4 for Printer menu

4.Printer

5.Print Reports

6.LAN

0.Initial Setup

Select ▲▼ & Set

—OR—

Press 5 for Print Reports menu

—OR—

Press 6 for LAN menu

(Only for MFC-8820DN or if the optional LAN board (NC-9100h) is

installed.)

—OR—

Press 0 for Initial Setup menu

—OR—

You can scroll more quickly through each menu level by pressing the

arrow for the direction you want:

3 - 2 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Then set an option by pressing Set when that option appears on the

LCD.

The LCD will then show the next menu level.

Press

to scroll to your next menu selection.

Press Set.

When you finish setting an option, the LCD shows Accepted.

Use to scroll backward if you passed your choices or want

to save keystrokes.

The current setting is always the option with “ ”.

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To access the menu, press

Menu.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

1.General

Setup

1.Mode Timer

—

0 Sec

30 Secs

1 Min

2 Mins

5 Mins

Off

Sets how longthe

MFCwill stay inCopy

or Scan mode before

returning to Fax

mode.

4-5

2.Paper Type 1.MP Tray

(MFC-8820D

Thin

Plain

Thick

Thicker

Transparency

Sets the type of

paper in the

Multi-purpose tray.

4-5

4-6

and

MFC-8820DN)

2.Tray #1

(This menuonly Plain

appears ifyou

have the

optional tray #2)

Thin

Sets the type of

paper in paper

tray#1.

Thick

Thicker

Transparency

3.Tray #2

(option)

Thin

Plain

Thick

Thicker

Transparency

Sets the type of

paper in paper

tray#2.

3.Paper Size 1.Tray #1

Sets thesizeofpaper

in paper tray#1.

(This menuonly Letter

appears ifyou

have the

optional tray #2)

Legal

Executive

2.Tray #2

(option)

Sets thesizeofpaper

in paper tray#2.

4-6

Letter

Legal

Executive

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 4 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

1.General

Setup

(Continued)

4.Volume

1.Ring

2.Beeper

3.Speaker

—

High

Med

Low

Off

Adjusts the ring

volume.

4-8

High

Med

Low

Off

Adjusts the volume

level of the beeper.

4-8

4-9

High

Med

Low

Off

Adjusts the speaker

volume.

5.Auto

Daylight

Off

Changes for Dayli ght

Savings Time automatically.

4-9

6.Ecology

1.Toner Save On

Off

Increases the life of

the toner cartridge.

2.Sleep Time

Conserves power.

4-10

4-11

7. Tray

Use:Copy

—

Tray#1 Only

MP Only

Auto

Selects the tray that

will be used for Copy

mode.

(For MFC -8420,

this menu doesn't

appear.)

(If you have the

opti onal tray #2,

see page 3 -15)

8. Tray

Use:Fax

(This setting only

appears if youhave

the optional tray #2,

see page 3 -15 .)

—

Selects the tray that

will be used for Fax

mode.

4-12

7.LCD

Adjusts thecontrastof

the LCD.

Contrast

(MFC-8420)

8.LCD

Contrast

(MFC-8820D /

8820D N)

9.LCD

Contrast

(With optional tray

#2)

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

2.Fax

1.Setup

1.Ring Delay 04

Sets the number of

rings beforethe MFC

answers in FAX or

FAX/TEL mode.

5-2

Receive

(In Fax mode

only)

2.F/T Ring

Time

Off

Sets the

5-3

pseudo/double-ring

time in FAX/TEL

mode.

3.Easy

Receive

Receives fax

messages without

pressing the Start

key.

5-4

5-8

4.Remote

Code

You can answer all

calls at an extension

or external phone

andusecodes toturn

the MFC on or off.

You can personalize

these codes.

(

51, #51)

Off

5.Auto

Reduction

Off

Reduces the size of

incoming faxes.

5-5

5-6

6.Print

Density

Makes printouts

darker or lighter.

7.Polling RX On

Off

Sets up your MFC to

poll another fax

machine.

5-9

8.Duplex

(MFC-8820D

and

Off

Prints received faxes

on both sides of the

paper.

5-10

MFC-8820DN)

2.Setup Send 1.Contrast

(In Fax mode

only)

Auto

Light

Dark

Changes the

lightnessor darkness

of faxes you send.

6-6

6-7

2.Fax

Resolution

Standard

Fine

Sets the default

resolution for

outgoi ng fax es .

S. Fine

Photo

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 6 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

2.Fax

(Continued)

2.Setup Send 3.Delayed

—

Setthe time of day in

24 hour format that

thedelayedfaxes will

be sent.

6-19

Fax

(Continued)

(In Fax mode

only)

4.Batch TX

Off

Combines delayed

faxes to the samefax

number at the same

timeof day into one

transmission.

6-20

5.Real Time

Off

Next Fax Only

You can send a fax

without using the

memory.

6-10

6-21

6.Polled TX

Off

Sets up the original

on your MFC to be

retrievedby another

fax machine.

7.Coverpg

Setup

Next Fax Only Automatically sends

6-12

a Cover Page you

have programmed.

Off

Print Sample

8.Coverpage

Msg

—

You can set up your

own comments for

fax Cover Page.

6-13

6-18

9.Overseas

Mode

Off

Adjusts for overseas

transmissions,which

cansometimes

cause problems.

0.Glass Fax

Size

A4/Letter

Legal

Adjusts the scan

area of the scanner

glass to the size of

the original.

6-4

7-1

7-2

3.Set Auto

Dial

1.One-Touch

Dial

Stores One-Touch

Dial numbers,soyou

candial by pressing

one key (and Start).

2.Speed-Dial

—

Stores Speed-Dial

numbers, soyou can

dial by pressing only

a few keys (and

Start).

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

2.Fax

(Continued)

3.Set Auto

Dial

(continued)

3.Setup

Groups

—

Sets up a Group

number for

Broadcasting.

7-4

4.Setup

Reports

Transmission On

Initial setup for

Transmission

Verification Report

and Fax Activity

Report.

9-1

9-2

On+Image

Off

Off+Image

2.Act.

Interval

Every 7 Days

Every 2 Days

Every 24 Hours

Every 12 Hours

Every 6 Hours

Every 50 Faxes

Off

5.RemoteFax

Opt

1.Fax

Fwd/Paging

Off

Fax Forward

Paging

Sets the MFC to

forward fax

messages or to call

your pager.

8-1

8-3

2.Fax

Stores incoming

Storage

faxes in the memory

so you can retrieve

them while you are

away fromyour MFC.

Off

3.Remote

Access

---

—

You must set your

own codeforRemote

Retr ieval.

8-4

5-5

4.Print Fax

Pr intsincomingfaxes

stored in the

memory .

6.Remaining

Jobs

—

Checks which jobs

ar e i n the memory or

cancels a delayed

fax or polling job.

6-11

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 8 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

2.Fax

(Continued)

0.Miscellaneous

Mem

—

Prohibits most

functions except

r eceiving faxes into

memory.

6-23

Security

2.Drum Life

—

You can check the

percentage of drum

life that remains

available.

22-37

3.Page

Total

Let you check

Counter

number of total

pages the MFC has

printed so far.

Copy

List/Fax

Distinctive Off

Uses the Telephone

Company’s

Distinctive Ring

subscriber serviceto

pattern with the MFC.

5-13

5-15

Set (On)

5.Caller ID

Display #

Print Report

View or print a list of

the last30 Caller IDs

stored in the

memory.

3.Copy

1.Quality

Text

Photo

Auto

Selects the Copy

resolutionfor your

typeof original.

10-16

2.Contrast

—

Adjusts the contrast

for copies.

4.Printer

1.Emulation

Auto

Selects the

11-17

Emulation mode.

HP LaserJet

BR-Script 3

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

4.Printer

(Continued)

2.Print

Options

1.Internal

Font

—

Prints a list ofthe

MFC’s internal fonts

or current printer

settings.

11-1 8

2.Configuration

—

11-1 8

3.Reset

Printer

—

Returns the MFC to

the original factory

defaultsettings.

5.Print

Reports

1.Help List

2.Auto Dial

—

You can print these

lists and reports.

9-3

3.Fax

Activity

Transmission

—

5.User

Settings

0.Initial

Setup

1.Receive

Mode

—

Fax Only

Fax/Tel

External TAD

Manual

You can choose the

receive modethat

best suits your

needs.

5-2

4-1

2.Date/Time

3.Station ID

—

Puts the date and

time on the LCD and

in headings of faxes

you send.

Fax

Tel

Name

Program your name,

fax andtelephone

number toappear on

each page you fax.

4-2

4-3

4.Tone/Pulse

(Canada Only)

—

Tone

Pulse

Selects the dialing

mode.

4-4

0.Local

English

Allows you tochange See

Language

(Canada Only)

the LCD Language

for your country.

Quick

Setup

Guide

French

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 10 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

If your machine is MFC-8820DN or you installed optional LAN

board (NC-9100h), the LCD shows the following LAN menu.

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

6.LAN

(MFC-8820DN

or option)

1.Setup

TCP/IP

BOOT Method Auto

You can choose the

BOOT method that

best suits your

needs.

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

2.IP Address [000-255].

[000-255].

Enter the IP address.

[000-255].

[000-255]

Subnet Mask [000-255].

Enter the Subnet

mask.

[000-255].

[000-255]

4.Gateway

[000-255].

[000-255]

Enter the Gateway

address.

See

Network

Us er’ s

Guide

on the

CD -ROM.

5.Host Name

BRN_XXXXXX

Enter theHostname.

.WINS Config Auto

You can choose the

WINS configuration

mode.

Static

7.WINS

Server

Primary

Secondary

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary orsecondary

server.

8.DNS Server Primary

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary orsecondary

server.

Secondary

9.APIPA

Off

Automatically

allocates theIP

address from the

link-local address

range.

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

6.LAN

(MFC-8820DN

or option)

2.Setup

Internet

1.Mail

Address

(60

characters)

Enter the mail

address.

SMTP Server [000-255].

Enter the SMTP

server address.

[000-255].

[000-255]

See

Net work

User’s

Guide

onthe

CD-ROM.

.POP3 Server [000-255].

Enter the POP3

server address.

[000-255].

[000-255]

4.Mailbox

Name

(up to 20

characters)

Enter the mail box

name.

Mailbox Pwd Password:**

Enter the password

to login to thePOP3

server.

****

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 12 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

6.LAN

(option)

(Continued)

3.Setup Mail 1.Auto

Off

Automatically checks

the POP3server for

new messages.

Polling

2.Poll

Frequency

10Min

Sets the interval for

checking for new

messages on the

POP3 server.

3.Header

All

Subject+From

+To

Selects the contents

of the mail header to

be printed.

None

4.Del Error

Mail

Off

Deletes error mails

automatically.

See

5.Notification On

MDN

Sends notification

messages.

Network

Us er’ s

Guide

on the

CD -ROM.

Off

4.Setup Mail 1.Sender

—

Displays the subject

thatis attached tothe

Internet Fax data.

Subject

2.Size Limit On

Limits the sizeof

E-mail documents.

Off

3.Notification On

Off

Sends notification

messages.

Setup Relay 1.Rly

Off

Relays adocument

to another fax

machine.

Broadcast

2.Relay

Domain

RelayXX:

Registers the

Domain name.

3.Relay

Report

Off

Prints the Relay

Broadcast Report.

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to accept

to exit

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Options

Descriptions

Page

6.LAN

(option)

(Continued)

Setup Misc. 1.Netware

Off

Select On to use the

MFC ona Netware

networ k.

2.Net Frame

Auto

8023

ENET

8022

SNAP

Lets you specify the

frametype.

3.AppleTalk

4.DLC/LLC

Off

Select On to use the

MFCon a Macintosh

networ k.

See

Off

Select On to use the

MFC ona DLC/LLC

networ k.

Net work

User’s

Guide

onthe

CD-ROM.

5.Net BIOS

/IP

Off

Select On to use the

MFC ona Net

BIOS/IP network.

6.Ethernet

Auto

Selects Ethernet link

mode.

100B-FD

100B-HD

10B-FD

10B-HD

7.Time Zone

GMT-XX:XX

Sets the time zone

for your country.

.Scan to

—

PDF

Selects the file type.

JPEG

The default settings are shown in Bold

with

3 - 14 ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you have the optional paper tray, the LCD displays these

options. (Menu, 1, 7/Menu, 1, 8)

(For MFC-8420 with the optional paper tray #2)

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

1.General

Setup

7.Tray

Use:Copy

—

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

Auto

Select the tray that

will be used for

copying.

4-11

8.Tray

Use:Fax

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

Auto

Select the tray that

will be used for

faxing.

4-12

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN with the optional paper tray #2)

Main Menu

Submenu

Selections

Optio ns

Descriptions

Page

1.General

Setup

7.Tray

Use:Copy

—

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

Select the tray that

will be used for

copying.

4-11

Auto

8.Tray

Use:Fax

—

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

Auto

Select the tray that

will be used for

faxing.

4-12

The default settings are shown in Bold

with .

ON-SCREEN PROGRAMMING 3 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting started

Initial Setup

Setting the Date and Time

Your MFC displays the date and time and if you set up the Station ID it

prints on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have

to reset the date and time. All other settings will not be affected.

Press Menu, 0, 2.

Enterthe last two digits of the year.

Press Set.

Enter two digits for the month.

02.Date/Time

Year:20XX

Enter & Set Key

Press Set.

(For example, enter 09 for September, or 10 for October.)

Enter two digits for the day.

Press Set.

(For example, enter 06 for 6th.)

Enter the time in 24-Hour format.

Press Set.

(For example, enter 15:25 for 3:25 P.M.)

Press Stop/Exit. The LCD now shows the date and time

whenever the MFC is in Standby mode.

GETTING STARTED 4 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Station ID

You should store your name or company name and fax number and

telephone number to be printed on all fax pages that you send.

Press Menu, 0, 3.

Enter your fax number (up to 20

digits).

03.Station ID

Fax:

Press Set.

Enter & Set Key

Enter your telephone number (up

to 20 digits).

Press Set.

(If your telephone number and fax number are the same, enter

the same number again).

The telephone number you enter is only used for Cover Page

features.(See Composing the electronic Cover Page on page

6 -12)

You can not enter a hyphen.

Use the dial pad to enter your name

(up to 20 characters).

Press Set.

(See Entering text on page 4-3.)

Press Stop/Exit.

The LCD will show the date and time.

If the Station ID has already been programmed, the LCD willask

you to press 1 to make a change or 2 to exit without changing.

4 - 2 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering text

When you are setting certain functions, such as the Station ID, you

may need to type text into the MFC. Most number keys have three or

four letters printed above them. The keys for0, # and

do not have

printed letters because they are used for special characters.

By pressing the appropriate number key repeatedly, you can access

the character you want.

Press Key

one time

two times

three times

four times

Inserting spaces

To enter a space, press

between characters.

once between numbers and twice

Making corrections

If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press

move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press

Clear/Back. The letter above the cursor will be deleted. Re-enter

the correct character.

Repeating letters

If you need to enter a character that is on the same key as the

previous character, press

you press the key again.

to move the cursor to the right before

GETTING STARTED 4 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Special characters and symbols

Press , # or 0, and then press

the special character or symbol you want. Then press Set to select it.

to move the cursor under

Press

for

(space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( )

: ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _

É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0

+ , - . /

Press #

Press 0

NOTICE (For USA)

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makesit unlawful

for any person to use a computer or electronic device to send any

message via a telephone fax machine unless such messages

clearly contain, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted

page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it

is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other

individual sending the message and the telephone number of the

sending machines or such business, other entity or individual.

In order to program this information into your MFC, complete the

steps described on page 4-2.

Setting Tone and Pulse dialing mode

(For Canada only)

Press Menu, 0, 4.

Press or

Pulse(or Tone).

Press Set.

04.Tone/Pulse

to select

▲

▼

Tone

Pulse

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

4 - 4 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Setup

Setting the Mode Timer

The MFC has three temporary mode keys on the control panel: Fax,

Copy and Scan. You can change the number of seconds or minutes

the MFC takes after the last Copy or Scan operation before it returns

to Fax mode. If you select Off, the MFC stays in the mode you used

last.

Press Menu, 1, 1.

Press or

0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,

2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.

11.Mode Timer

▲

0 Sec

to select

30 Secs

1 Min

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Setting the Paper Type

To get the best print quality, set the MFC for the type of paper you

are using.

For MFC-8420

Press Menu, 1, 2.

—OR—

If you have the optional paper tray,

press Menu, 1, 2, 1 to set the

paper type for Tray #1or Menu,

1, 2, 2 to set the paper type for

Tray #2.

12.Paper Type

▲

Plain

Thick

Thicker

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

12.Paper Type

1.Tray #1

2.Tray #2

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

to select Thin, Plain, Thick, Thickeror

Transparency.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

GETTING STARTED 4 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN

Press Menu, 1, 2, 1 to set the

paper type for MP Tray.

—OR—

12.Paper Type

1.MP Tray

2.Tray #1

3.Tray #2

Press Menu, 1, 2, 2 to set the

paper type for Tray #1.

Select ▲▼ & Set

—OR—

If you have the optional paper tray, press Menu, 1, 2, 3 to set

the paper type for Tray #2.

Press

to select Thin,

12.Paper Type

1.MP Tray

Plain, Thick, Thicker or

Transparency.

▲

Plain

Thick

▼

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can select Transparency for Tray #1 and Tray #2

only when A4, Letteror Legal is selected in Menu, 1, 3.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Setting the Paper Size

You can use eight sizes of paper for printing copies: A4, letter, legal,

executive, A5, A6, B5 and B6 and three sizes of paper for printing

faxes: A4, letter and legal. When you change the size of paper in the

MFC, you will need to change the setting for Paper Size at the same

time so your MFC can fit an incoming fax or reduced copy on the

page.

Press Menu, 1, 3.

Press or

Letter Legal

A6B5orB6

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

13.Paper Size

▲

to select A4

Letter

Legal

Executive A5,

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

With optional paper tray (LT-5000)

Press Menu, 1, 3, 1 to set the

paper size for Tray #1.

13.Paper Size

1.Tray #1

2.Tray #2

—OR—

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Menu, 1, 3, 2 to set the

paper size for Tray #2

4 - 6 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press

A5, A6

to select A4, Letter, Legal, Executive,

B5and B6.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

■ If you are using the optional paper tray, paper size A6 is not

available.

■ If you select Transparency in Menu, 1, 2, you can only

select A4, Letteror Legal.

GETTING STARTED 4 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Ring Volume

You can adjust the ring volume when your MFC is idle (not being

used). You can turn the ring Offor you can select the ring volume

level.

Press Menu, 1, 4, 1.

Press or to select

(Low, Med, Highor Off).

Press Set.

14.Volume

1.Ring

▲

Med

▼

High

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

—OR—

In Fax mode, press

to adjust the volume level. Every time

you press these keys, the MFC will ring so you can hear the active

setting as the LCD shows it. The volume changes with each key

press. The new setting will stay until you change it again.

Setting the Beeper Volume

You can change the beeper volume. The default (factory) setting is

Med. When the beeper is on, the MFC beeps every time you press a

key or make a mistake and after a fax is sent or received.

Press Menu, 1, 4, 2.

14.Volume

2.Beeper

Press

to select your

▲

Med

option.

▼

High

(Low, Med, Highor Off)

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

4 - 8 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Speaker Volume

You can adjust the MFC’s one-way speaker volume.

Press Menu, 1, 4, 3.

Press or to select

(Low, Med, High or Off).

Press Set.

14.Volume

3.Speaker

▲

Med

▼

High

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

—OR—

In Fax mode, you can adjust the speaker volume by pressing Hook,

and then selecting a speaker volume level.

Press or

to adjust the volume level. The LCD shows the setting

you are choosing. Each key press changes the volume to the next

setting. The new setting will remain until you change it again.

Turning on Automatic Daylight Savings Time

You can set the MFC to change automatically for Daylight Savings

Time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and backward

one hour in the Fall. Make sure you have set the correct day and time

in the Date/Timesetting.

Press Menu, 1, 5.

15.Auto Daylight

Press

to select On(or

▲

▼

Off

Off).

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

Toner Save

You can conserve toner using this feature. When you set Toner Save

to On, print appears somewhat lighter. The default setting is Off.

Press Menu, 1, 6, 1.

16.Ecology

1.Toner Save

Press

to select On(or

▲

▼

Off

Off).

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

GETTING STARTED 4 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sleep Time

Setting the Sleep Time reduces power consumption by turning off

the fuser inside the MFC, while it is idle. You can choose how long

the MFC is idle (from 00 to 99 minutes) before it goes into sleep

mode. The timer is automatically reset when the MFC receives a Fax

or PC data, or makes a copy. The factory setting is 05 minutes. While

the MFC is in sleep mode, you will see Sleepon the LCD. If you try

to print or copy in sleep mode, there will be a short delay while the

fuser warms up to working temperature.

Press Menu, 1, 6, 2.

Use the dial pad to enter the length of time the MFC is idle

before it goes into sleep mode (00 to 99).

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

■ If you want to turn sleep mode off, press Secure and Job

Cancel simultaneously in Step 2.

■ If the MFC is in Sleep Mode when you change the Sleep

Time, the new setting will take effect the next time the MFC

copies, prints or is restarted.

Turning off the Scanner Lamp

The scanner lamp stays on for 16 hours before automatically

switching off to preserve the life of the lamp. You can turn off the

scanner lamp manually if you wish by pressing the

and

keys

simultaneously. The scanner lamp will remain turned off untilthe next

time you use the scanning feature.

Turning off the scanner lamp will also reduce the power

consumption.

Please note that turning the lamp off regularly will reduce the

lamp’slife. Some people prefer to turn the lamp off as they leave

the office, or late at night at home. This is not necessary for

normal day to day use.

4 - 10 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Tray Use for Copy mode

If your MFC is a MFC-8420 without the optional tray #2, you can

skip this setting.

MFC-8420

The default setting of Autoallows^*1your MFC to choose the optional

Tray #2 when paper isout in Tray #1 or^*2when the size of the original

will fit best on the paper in Tray #2.

Press Menu, 1, 7.

Press or to selectTray#1

Only Tray#2 Only, or Auto

17.Tray Use: Copy

▲

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

Auto

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN

The default setting of Autoallows^*1your MFC to choose the optional

Tray #2 or the MP tray when paper is out in Tray #1 or^*2when the

size of the original will fit best on the paper in Tray #2.

Press Menu, 1, 7.

Press or

Tray#1 Only, MP Only, or

Auto.

17.Tray Use: Copy

▲

Tray#1 Only

MP Only

Auto

to select

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

—OR—

If you have the optional paper tray,

17.Tray Use: Copy

▲

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

press

to select

Tray#1 Only,Tray#2 Only, MP

Onlyor Auto.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

*1 Copies will automatically be printed from Tray #2 only if the

Paper Size setting for Tray #2 is the same as Tray #1.

*2 When using the ADF, copies will automatically be printed

from Tray #2 if the Paper Size setting for Tray #2 is different

than Tray #1 and this paper size is more suitable for the

scanned original.

GETTING STARTED 4 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Tray Use for Fax mode

If your MFC doesn’t have the optional tray #2, you can skip this setting.

The default setting of Autoallows your MFC to choose the optional

Tray #2 if Tray #1 is out of paper or if incoming faxes will fit best on

the paper in Tray #2.

Press Menu, 1, 8.

Press or toselectTray#1

Only Tray#2 Only, or Auto

18.Tray Use: Fax

▲

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

Auto

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

If Auto Reductionisturned on, incoming faxeswill be printed

from the tray that is set for Auto Reduction. (See Printing a

reduced incoming fax (Auto Reduction) on page 5-5.)

Setting the LCD Contrast

You can change the contrast to help the LCD look lighter or darker.

(MFC-8420)

19.LCD Contrast

Press Menu, 1, 7.

(MFC-8820D/8820DN)

Press Menu, 1, 8.

—OR—

Select

& Set

If you have the optional tray #2, press Menu, 1, 9.

Press

to increase the contrast.

to decrease the contrast.

—OR—

Press

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

4 - 12 GETTING STARTED

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Receive

Basic receiving operations

Choosing the Receive Mode

There are four different Receive Modes for your MFC. You can

choose the mode that best suits your needs.

LCD

How it works

When to useit

Fax Only

(automatic receive)

The MFC automatically

answers every call as a

fax.

For dedicated fax lines.

Fax/Tel*

(fax and telephone)

The MFC controls the

line and automatically

Use this modeif you expect toreceive lots offax

messages and few telephone calls. You cannot

answers every call.If the havean answeringmachine onthesameline, even

call is a fax it will receive if it is ona separatewall jack/phone socket on the

thefax.If thecall is nota same line. You cannot use the telephone

(with an external or

extension telephone)

fax it will ring

company’s Voice Mail in this mode.

(pseudo/double ring) for

you to pick up the call.

External TAD

(with an external

answering machine)

The external answering

machine (TAD)

automatically answers

every call.

Voice messages are

stored on the external

TAD. Fax messages are

printed.

Use this modeif you have an external answering

machine on your phone line.

The TAD setting works only with an external

answeringmachine.RingDelay andF/TRingTime

do not work in this setting.

Manual

(manual receive)

You control the phone

line and must answer

every call yourself.

Use this modewhen you areusing a computer

modem on thesameline or if you don’t receive

many fax messages or withDistinctive Ring.

Ifyouhear fax tones, wait until the MFC takes over

thecall,then hang up.(Se e E a s y Receive o n p age

5-4.)

(with an external or

extension telephoneor

with Distinctive Ring)

* In Fax/Telmode you must set the Ring Delay and F/T Ring Time.

If you have extension phones on the line, keep the Ring Delay set to

four rings.

The MP tray is not available with Fax Receive.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To select or change your Receive Mode

Press Menu, 0, 1.

Press or

Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD

or Manual.

01.Receive Mode

▲

Fax Only

to select Fax

Fax/Tel

External TAD

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

If you are changing the Receive Mode while in another

operation, the LCD will return to that operation.

Fax Only

Fax/Tel

03/01/2003 18:15

External TAD

Dial & Start

Duplex Receive

External TAD

Manual

Setting the Ring Delay

The Ring Delay sets the number of times the MFC rings before it

answers in Fax Onlyor Fax/Tel mode. If you have extension

phones on the same line as the MFC or subscribe to the telephone

company’s Distinctive Ring service, keep the Ring Delay setting of 4.

(See Easy Receive on page 5-4 and Operation from extension

tele p hones on page 5-7.)

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 1.

21.Setup Receive

1.Ring Delay

Press

to select how

▲

many times the line rings before

the MFC answers (00-04).

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

(If you select 00, the line won’t ring at all.)

Press Stop/Exit.

5 - 2 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)

If you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel, you’ll need to decide how long

the MFC will signal you with its special pseudo/double-ring when you

have a voice call. (If it’s a fax call, the MFC prints the fax.)

This pseudo/double-ring happens after the initial ringing from the

phone company. Only the MFC rings (for 20, 30, 40 or 70 seconds)

and no other phones on the same line will ring with the special

pseudo/double-ring. However, you can still answer the call on any

extension phone (in a separate wall jack/phone socket) on the same

line as the MFC. (See Operation f r om extension telephones on page

5-7.)

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 2.

21.Setup Receive

2.F/T Ring Time

Press

to select how

▲

long the MFC will ring to alert you

that you have a voice call.

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing,

the MFC will continue to ring for the set time.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Easy Receive

When you use this feature, you don’t have to press Start or the Fax

Receive Code 51 when you answer a fax call. Selecting Onallows

the MFC to receive fax callsautomatically, even if you lift the handset

of an extension or externalphone. When you see Receivingon the

LCD or when you hear ‘chirps’ through the handset of an extension

phone connected to another wall jack/phone socket, just replace the

handset and your MFC will do the rest. Selecting Offmeans you’ll

have to activate the MFC yourself by lifting the handset of an external

or extension phone, and then press Start on the MFC

—OR—by pressing 51 if you are not at your MFC. (S e e Operation

fr o m extension telephones on page 5-7.)

If this feature is set to On, but your MFC doesn’t connect a fax

call when you lift a extension or external phone handset, press

the Fax Receive Code 51.

If you send faxes from a computer on the same phone line and

the MFC intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 3.

21.Setup Receive

3.Easy Receive

Use

to select On (or

▲

Off

Off).

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

5 - 4 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing a reduced incoming fax

(Auto Reduction)

If you choose On, the MFC automatically reduces an incoming fax to

fit on one page of letter, legal or A4 size paper, regardless of the

paper size of the original. The MFC calculates the reduction ratio by

using the page size of the original and your Paper Size setting

(Menu, 1, 3).

If it is not illuminated in green, press

Press Menu, 2, 1, 5.

If you have the optional paper tray

(Fax).

21.Setup Receive

5.Auto Reduction

▲

Off

#2, press

to select

▼

Tray #1or Tray #2.

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Use

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

to select On (or Off).

If you receive faxes that are split onto two pages, turn on this

setting.

Printing a fax from the memory

If you set Fax Storage to ON for Remote Retrieval, you can still print

a fax from the memory when you are at your MFC. (See Setting Fax

Storage on page 8-3.)

Press Menu, 2, 5, 4.

Press Start.

After printing has finished,

press Stop/Exit.

25.Remote Fax Opt

4.Print Fax

Press Start

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Print Density

You can adjust print density, making your printed pages darker or

lighter.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.

21.Setup Receive

6.Print Density

Press

to make the print darker.

—OR—

Press

Select

& Set

to make the print lighter.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

5 - 6 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced receiving operations

Operation from extension telephones

If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, or an external

telephone in the EXT. jack, you can make your MFC take the call by

using the Fax Receive Code. When you press theFax Receive Code

51, the MFC starts to receive a fax.

(See Easy Receive on page 5-4.)

If the MFC answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to

take over, use theTelephone Answer Code #51 to take the call at an

extension phone. (See Setting the F/T R i ng Time (Fax/Tel mode

only) on page 5-3.)

If you answer a calland no one is on the line, you should assume that

you’re receiving a manual fax.

■ At an extension phone (on a separate telephone wall jack/phone

socket), press 51, wait for fax-receiving tones (chirps), and

then hang up.

■ At an external phone (connected to the MFC’s EXT jack), press

51 and wait for the phone to be disconnected before you hang

up (the LCD shows Receiving).

Your caller will have to press Start to send the fax.

For FAX/TEL mode only

When the MFC is in FAX/TEL mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time

(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.

Lift the external telephone's handset, and then press Hook to

answer.

If you’re at an extension phone, you’ll need to lift the handset during

the F/T Ring Time and then press #51 between the double rings. If

no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the

call back to the MFC by pressing 51.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using a cordless external handset

If your cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the MFC

and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to

answer calls during the Ring Delay. If you let the MFC answer first,

you willhave to go to the MFC so you can press Hook to transfer the

call to the cordless handset.

Changing the remote codes

Remote Codes might not work with some telephone systems. The

preset Fax Receive Code is 51. The preset Telephone Answer

Code is # 51.

If you are always disconnected when accessing your external

TAD remotely, try changing the Fax Receive Code and

Telephone Answer Code to another three-digit code (such as

### and 999).

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 4.

21.Setup Receive

4.Remote Code

Press

to select On(or

▲

Off

Off).

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

If you want to, enter a new Fax

Receive Code.

Press Set.

If you want to, enter a new Telephone Answer Code.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

5 - 8 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Polling

Polling is the process of retrieving faxes from another fax machine.

You can use your MFC to ‘poll’ other machines, or you can have

someone poll your MFC.

Everyone who is involved in Polling needs to set up their fax

machines for Polling. When someone polls your MFC to receive a

fax, theypay for the call. If you poll someone’s fax machine to receive

a fax, you pay for the call.

Some fax machines do not respond to the Polling feature.

Setting up Polling Receive

Polling Receive is when you call another faxmachine to receive a fax

from it.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.

21.Setup Receive

7.Polling RX

Press

to select On(or

▲

Off

Off).

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Enter the fax number you are

polling.

Press Start.

The LCD shows Dialing.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up Sequential Polling Receive

Your MFC can ask for faxes from several fax units in a single

operation (Sequential Polling Receive). Afterwards, a Sequential

Polling Report will be printed.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.

21.Setup Receive

7.Polling RX

Press

to select On(or

▲

Off

Off).

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Enter the fax machines you want

to poll using One-Touch, Speed-Dial, a Group or the dial pad.

You must press Set between each fax number.

Press Start. Your MFC will poll each number or Group number

in turn to receive a fax.

Setting Duplex printing for Fax mode

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

If you set Duplex to Onfor fax receive, the MFC prints received faxes

on both sides of the paper.

You can use three sizes of paper for this function - letter, legal and

A4.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.

21.Setup Receive

8.Duplex

Press

to select On (or

▲

Off

Off).

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

While the Duplex printing for fax is working, auto reduction is

also On temporarily.

5 - 10 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Telephone services

Your MFC supports the Distinctive Ring telephone service that some

telephone companies offer.

If you have Voice Mail, RingMaster, an answering service, an

alarm system or other custom features on your telephone line, it

may affect the way your MFC works. (See Custom features on

page 1-13 and Custom features on a single line. on page 22-14.)

If you have Voice Mail on your phone line, please read the

following carefully.

Distinctive Ring

Brother uses the term ‘Distinctive Ring’ but different telephone

companies have other names for this service such as SmartRing,

RingMaster, Teen-Ring, Indent-a-Call or Indent-a-Ring.

What does your telephone company’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service allows you to

have more than one number on the same phone line. If you need

more than one phone number, it is cheaper than paying for an

extra line. Each phone number has its own distinctive ring pattern,

so you will know which phone number is ringing. This is one way you

can have a separate phone number for your MFC.

Please call your telephone company for availability and rates.

What does Brother’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

The Brother MFC has a Distinctive Ring feature that allows you to

use your MFC to take full advantage of the telephone company’s

Distinctive Ring service. The new phone number on your line can just

receive faxes.

You must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring

service before you program the MFC to work with it.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do you have Voice Mail?

If you have Voice Mail on the phone line that you willinstall your new

MFC on, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the MFC will

conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls. However, the

Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use more than one

number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the MFC can work

together without any problems. If each one has a separate phone

number, neither will interfere with the other’s operations.

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring service from the telephone

company, you will need to follow the directions below to ‘register’ the

new Distinctive Ring pattern they give you. This is so your MFC can

recognize its incoming calls.

You can change or cancel the Distinctive Ring pattern at any

time. You can switch it off temporarily, and turn it back on later.

When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this

feature.

Before you choose the ring pattern to register

You can only register one Distinctive Ring pattern with the MFC.

Some ring patterns cannot be registered. The ring patterns below are

supported by your Brother MFC. Register the one your telephone

company gives you.

Ring

Pattern

Rings

long-long

short-long-short

short-short-long

very long (normal pattern)

If the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, please call

your telephone company and ask for one that is shown.

5 - 12 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ The MFC will only answer calls to its registered number.

■ The first two rings are silent on the MFC. This is because the fax

must «listen» to the ring pattern (to compare it to the pattern that

was ‘registered’). (Other telephones on the same line will ring.)

■ If you program the MFC properly, it will recognize the registered

ring pattern of the ‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and then

answer with a fax tone. When the ‘voice number’ is called, the

MFC will not answer.

Registering the Distinctive Ring pattern

Very important!

After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature to ON, the receive

mode is set to Manualautomatically. Unless you have a TAD or

Voice Mail set up on the Distinctive Ring number, Manualmode

means you must answer all the calls yourself. You can not change

the receive mode to the other mode while the Distinctive Ring is set

to on.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 4.

20.Miscellaneous

4.Distinctive

Press

to select Set.

▲

Off

Set

Press Set.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

to select the

stored ring pattern you want to use.

Press Set.

(You will hear each pattern as you scroll through the four

patterns. Make sure you choose the pattern that the telephone

company gave you.)

Press Stop/Exit.

Distinctive Ring is now set to on.

Turning off the Distinctive Ring

Press Menu, 2, 0, 4.

20.Miscellaneous

4.Distinctive

Press

to select Off.

▲

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

▼

Off

Select ▲▼ & Set

If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the MFC will stay in Manual

receive mode. You will need to set the Receive Mode again.

(See To select or change your Receive Mode on page 5-2.)

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Caller ID

The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller ID subscriber

service offered by many local telephone companies. This

service provides you, by means of the LCD, the name or

telephone number of your caller as the line rings.

After a few rings, the LCD showsthe telephone number of your caller

(or name, if available). Once you pick up the handset, the Caller ID

information disappears from the LCD, but the call information

remains stored in the Caller ID memory.

■ You will see the first 16 characters of the number (or name).

■ Out of Areadisplay means call originated outside your Caller

ID service area.

■ Private Calldisplay means the caller has intentionally

blocked transmission of information.

If both the name and number are received, the LCD shows only the

name. You can print a list of Caller ID information received by your

MFC. (See Prin t i ng Caller ID List on page 5-1 5.)

Caller ID service varies with different carriers. Call your local

telephone company to determine the kind of service available in your

area.

5 - 14 SETUP RECEIVE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Caller ID List

Caller ID memory stores information for up to thirty calls. When the

thirty-first call comesin, information about the first call iserased. You

can scrollthrough Caller ID information to review those calls made to

your MFC.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 5.

Press or to select

Display #.

Press Set.

20.Miscellaneous

4.Caller ID

▲

Display#

▼

Print Report

Select ▲▼ & Set

If the name wasnot received, it will

not be displayed.

Press

to scroll through the Caller ID memory to

select the Caller ID you want to view, and then press Set. The

LCD shows the caller’s name and number and the date and time

of the call.

Press

—OR—

to return to the Caller ID listing.

Press Stop/Exit.

Clearing a Caller ID stored in the memory

For effective use of the memory, we recommend that you clear the

Caller IDsstored in memory by pressing Clear/Back when the LCD

shows each caller ID number or name.

Printing Caller ID List

Press Menu, 2, 0, 5.

Press or to select

Print Report.

Press Set.

20.Miscellaneous

5.Caller ID

▲

Display#

▼

Print Report

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Start.

After printing has finished,

press Stop/Exit.

SETUP RECEIVE 5 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Send

How to Fax

You can send faxes from the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or

from the scanner glass.

Enter Fax mode

Before sending faxes, make sure

(Fax) is illuminated in

green. If not, press

setting is Fax.

(Fax) to enter Fax mode. The default

Faxing from the automatic document feeder (ADF)

The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds each sheet individually.

Use standard (20 lb or 75 g/m²) paper and always fan the pages

before putting them in the ADF.

DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped,

stapled, paper clipped, pasted or taped.

DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric. (To fax this kind

of original, see Faxing from the scanner glass on page 6-3.)

■ Make sure originals written with ink are completely dry.

■ The originals to be faxed must be from 5.8 to 8.5 inches wide and

5.8 to 14 inches long.

SETUP SEND 6 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Faxing from the ADF

ADF Document

Support Extension

If it is not illuminated in

ADF

green, press

Document

Output

Support

Flap

(Fax). Pull out the ADF

Document Support

Extension.

Unfold the ADF

Document Output

Support Flap.

Fan the pages well and

stagger them at an angle. Make sure you put the originals face

up, top edge first in the ADF until you feel them touch the feed

roller.

Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your originals.

The originals are

Face Up

in the ADF

Document Support

Dial the fax number.

Press Start. The MFC starts scanning the first page.

6 - 2 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Faxing from the scanner glass

You can use the scanner glass to fax pages of a book or one page

at a time. The originals can be up to letter, A4 or legal size (8.5 inches

to 14 inches). To cancel, press Stop/Exit.

Ifit isnotilluminatedingreen,press

(Fax). Lift the document cover.

The originals are

Face Down on the

Scanner Glass

Document

Guidelines

Using the document guidelines on the left, center the original

face down on the scanner glass.

Close the document cover.

If the originalis a book or is thick, do not slam the cover or press

on it.

Dial the fax number.

Press Start.

The MFC starts scanning the first page.

To send a single page, press 2 (or

Flatbed Fax:

Next Page?

press Start again). The MFC starts

▼ 1.Yes

▲ 2.No(Send)

sending the original.

—OR—

Select ▲▼ & Set

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 6.

Place the next page on the

scanner glass.

Flatbed Fax:

Set Next Page

Then Press Set

Press Set.

The MFC startsscanning. (Repeat

Steps 5 and 6 for each additional

page.)

■ If the memory is full and you are faxing a single page, it will

be sent in real time.

■ If you need to cancel before the fax is sent, press Stop/Exit.

SETUP SEND 6 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Faxing legal size originals from the scanner glass

When originals are legal size, you need to set the Glass Fax Size to

Legal. If you do not, the bottom portion of the faxes will be missing.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 0.

Press

to select Legal.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

Out of Memory message

If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page

of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel the scan. If you get an Out of

Memorymessage while scanning a subsequent page, you will have

the option to press Start to send the pages scanned so far, or to

press Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

Manual transmission

Manual transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and

fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Pick up the handset of the external phone and listen for a dial

tone.

—OR—

Press Hook and listen for a dial tone.

On the external phone, dial the fax number you want to call. If

you pressed Hook, dial using the MFC dial pad.

When you hear the fax tone,

press Start.

If you are using the ADF, go to Step 6.

Send or Receive?

If you are using the scanner glass,

go to Step 5.

▲ 1.Send

▼ 2.Receive

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press 1 to send a fax.

If you picked up the handset of the external phone, replace it.

6 - 4 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Automatic transmission

This is the easiest way to send a fax.

You must not pick up the handset of the external phone or press

Hook to listen for a dial tone.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Enter the fax number using the dial pad, One-Touch,

Speed-Dial or Search.

(See One-Touch Dialing on page 7-5 and S p eed-D i aling on

page 7-6 .)

Press Start.

If you are using the scanner glass, press 2 or Start.

Sending a fax at the end of a conversation

At the end of a conversation you can send a fax to the other party

before you both hang up.

Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to

press Start before hanging up.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Start.

The LCD shows:

Send or Receive?

Press 1 to send the fax.

Replace the external handset.

▲ 1.Send

▼ 2.Receive

Select ▲▼ & Set

SETUP SEND 6 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic sending operations

Sending faxes using multiple settings

When you send a fax you can choose any combination of these

settings: cover page, contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed

fax timer, polling transmission or real time transmission. After each

setting is accepted, the LCD will ask if you want to enter more

settings:

Press 1 to select more settings. The

22.Setup Send

Other Settings?

1.Yes

LCD will return to the Setup Send

▲

▼

menu.

2.No

—OR—

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press 2 if you have finished choosing

settings and go to the next step.

Contrast

If your original is very light or very dark, you maywant to set the contrast.

Use Lightto make the fax darker.

Use Darkto make the fax lighter.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 1.

22.Setup Send

1.Contrast

Press

to select Auto,

▲

▼

Auto

Light

Lightor Dark.

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press1 if you want to choose more

settings and the LCD will return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press2 if you have finished choosing settings for this page, and

then go to Step 5.

Enter a fax number.

6 - 6 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press Start to send the fax from the ADF.

The MFC starts scanning the first page.

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.

To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again).

The MFC starts sending the original.

—OR—

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.

Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Set.

The MFC starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat Step 7

and 8 for each additional page).

Fax Resolution

When you have an original in the ADF or on the scanner glass you

can use the Resolution key to change the setting temporarily (for

this fax only). If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Resolution repeatedly until the LCD shows the setting you

want.

—OR—

You can change the default setting.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 2.

22.Setup Send

2.Fax Resolution

Press

to select the

▲

▼

Standard

Fine

Select ▲▼ & Set

resolution you want.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

Standard: Suitable for most typed originals.

Fine:

Good for small print and transmits a little slower than

Standard resolution.

S.Fine:

Photo:

Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower

than Fine resolution.

Use when the original has varying shades of gray.

This has the slowest transmission time.

SETUP SEND 6 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual and automatic fax Redial

If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press

Redial/Pause, and then press Start to try again. If you want to

make a second call to the last number dialed, you can save time by

pressing Redial/Pause and Start.

Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from the control panel.

If you are sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the MFC

will automatically redial one time after five minutes.

6 - 8 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dual Access

You can dial a number, and begin scanning the fax into memory—

even when the MFC is receiving, sending or printing a fax from

memory. The LCD shows the new job number.

If you get a Out Of Memorymessage while scanning the first

page of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you get a

Out Of Memorymessage while scanning a subsequent page,

you can pressStart to send the pages scanned so far, or press

Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Enter the fax number.

Press Start to send the fax.

The MFC starts scanning the first page and the LCD shows the

job number (#XXX) of the fax. You can repeat Steps 1 to 3 for

the next fax.

—OR—

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 5.

To send a single page,

press 2 (or press Start again).

The MFC starts sending the

original.

—OR—

To send more than one page,

press 1 and go to Step 5.

Place the next page on the

scanner glass. Press Set.

Flatbed Fax:

Next Page?

▲ 1.Yes

▼ 2.No(Send)

Select ▲▼ & Set

Flatbed Fax:

Set Next Page

Then Press Set

The MFC starts scanning, and

then returns to Step 4. (Repeat

Steps 4 and 5 for each additional

page). To send the next fax, go to Step 1.

SETUP SEND 6 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Real Time Transmission

When you are sending a fax, the MFC will scan the originals into the

memory before sending. Then, as soon as the phone line is free, the

MFC will start dialing and sending.

If the memory becomes full, the MFC will send the original in real

time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off).

Sometimes, you may want to send an important original immediately,

without waiting for memory transmission. You can set Real Time

TX to Onfor all originals or for the next fax only.

If you want to fax multiple pages, use ADF.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.

To change the default setting,

22.Setup Send

5.Real Time TX

▲

▼

Next Fax Only

press

to select On(or

Off).

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Go to Step 5.

—OR—

For the next fax transmission only, press

to select

Next Fax Only.

Press Set.

Press

Fax:Off).

Press Set.

to select Next Fax:On (or Next

Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will

return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press2 if you have finished choosing settings for this page, and

then go to Step 6.

Enter the fax number.

Press Start to send the fax.

In Real Time Transmission using the scanner glass, the auto

redial function doesn't work.

6 - 10 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking job status

Check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent. (If there

are no jobs, the LCD shows No Jobs Waiting.)

Press Menu, 2, 6.

If you have more than one job

waiting, press

scroll through the list.

26.Remaining Jobs

▲ #001 12:34 BROTHER

#002 15:00 BIC

▼ #003 17:30 ABCDEFG

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

Canceling a job while scanning the original

You can cancel a job while you are scanning it into memory by

pressing Stop/Exit.

Canceling a scheduled job

You can cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in memory. (See

Checking job status on page 6-11.)

Press Menu, 2, 6.

Any jobs that are waiting will

appear on the LCD.

26.Remaining Jobs

▲ #001 12:34 BROTHER

#002 15:00 BIC

▼ #003 17:30 ABCDEFG

Select ▲▼ & Set

If you have more than two jobs

waiting, press

select the job you want to cancel.

Press Set.

—OR—

If you only have one job waiting, go to Step 3.

Press 1 to cancel.

—OR—

Press 2 to exit without canceling.

To cancel another job go to Step 2.

Press Stop/Exit.

SETUP SEND 6 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced sending operations

Composing the electronic Cover Page

The Cover Page is created at the receiving machine. Your Cover

Page includes the name stored in the One-Touch or Speed-Dial

memory. If you’re dialing manually, the name is left blank.

The Cover Page shows your Station ID and the number of pages

you’re sending. (See Setting the Station ID on page 4-2.) If you have

Cover Page set to ON (Menu, 2, 2, 7), the number of pages is left

blank.

You can select a comment to include on your Cover Page.

1.Comment Off

2.Please Call

3.Urgent

4.Confidential

Instead of using one of the preset comments, you can enter two

personal messages of your own, up to 27 characters long. Use the

chart on page 4-3 for help entering characters.

(See Composing your own comments on page 6-13.)

5.(User Defined)

6.(User Defined)

Most of the Setup Send settings are temporary to allow you to

make changes for each fax you send. However, when you set up

your Cover Page and Cover Page Comments, you are changing the

default settings so they will be available while faxing.

6 - 12 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Composing your own comments

You can set up two comments of your own.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 8.

22.Setup Send

8.Coverpage Msg

Press

to choose 5 or

▲

▼

6 for your own comment.

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Use the dial pad to enter your

customized comment.

Press Set.

(See Entering text on page 4-3.)

Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will

return to the Setup Sendmenu

—OR—

Press 2 to exit.

SETUP SEND 6 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cover page for the next fax only

This feature does not work without the Station ID. So make sure it

has been set. (See Se t t ing the Station ID on page 4-2.) If you only

want to send a Cover Page with a particular fax, this Cover Page will

include the number of pages in your original.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.

When LCD shows Next Fax

Only.

22.Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

▲

▼

Next Fax Only

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press

Fax:Off).

to select Next Fax:On(or Next

Press Set.

Press

comments.

to select one of the standard or your own

Press Set.

Enter two digits to show the number of pages you are sending.

Press Set.

(For example, press 0, 2 for 2 pages or enter 0 0 to leave the

number of pages blank. If you make a mistake, press to back

up and re-enter the number of pages.)

Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will

return to the Setup Sendmenu

—OR—

Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings.

Enter the fax number you’re calling.

Press Start.

6 - 14 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Send a cover page for all faxes

This feature does not work without the Station ID. Please be sure it

has been set before continuing. (See Setting the Station ID on page

4 -2.)

You can set the MFC to send a cover page whenever you send a fax.

The number of pages in your fax is not included when you use this

setting.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.

22.Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

Press

to select On.

▲

▼

Next Fax Only

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

If you selected On, Press

to select one of the standard or your own comments.

Press Set.

Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will

return to the Setup Sendmenu

—OR—

Press 2 to exit if you have finished choosing settings.

Using a printed cover page

If you prefer to use a printed cover page that you can write on, you

can print the sample page and attach it to your fax.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.

Press

to select

22.Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

Print Sample.

▲

▼

Press Set.

Press Start. Your MFC prints a

copy of your cover page.

Print Sample

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

SETUP SEND 6 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Broadcasting

Broadcasting is when the same fax message is automatically sent to

more than one fax number. Using the Set key, you can include

Groups, One-Touch, Speed-Dial numbers and up to 50 manually

dialed numbers. If you did not use up any of the numbers for Groups,

access codes or credit card numbers, you can ‘broadcast’ faxes to

as many as 390 different numbers. However, the available memory

will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the

number of locations used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the

maximum numbersavailable, you willnot be able to use Dual Access

and Delayed fax.

To include One-Touch or Speed-Dial numbers and manually dialed

numbers in the same broadcast, you must press Set between each

of the numbers. Use Search/Speed Dial to help you choose the

numbers easily.

(See Se t t ing up Groups for Br o adcasting on page 7-4.)

After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast Report will be printed to

let you know the results.

■ Enter the long dialing sequence numbers as you would normally,

but remember that each One-Touch and Speed-Dial number

counts as one number, so the number of locations you can store

becomes limited.

■ If the memory is full, press Stop/Exit to stop the job or if more

than one page has been scanned, press Start to send the

portion that is in the memory.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Enter a number using One-Touch, Speed-Dial, a Group

number, Search or manual dialing using the dial pad.

(Example: Group number)

When the LCD displays the fax number of the other party, press

Set.

You will be asked to press the next number.

6 - 16 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter the next number.

(Example: Speed-Dial number)

When the LCD displays the fax number of the other party, press

Set.

Enter another fax number.

(Example: Manual dialing using the dial pad.)

Press Start.

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 8.

To send a single page,

press 2 (or press Start again).

The MFC starts sending the fax.

—OR—

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 9.

Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Set.

The MFC starts scanning and returns to Step 8. (Repeat Step 8

and 9 for each additional page).

SETUP SEND 6 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overseas Mode

If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to possible

interference on the phone line, we recommend that you turn on the

Overseas Mode. After you send a fax using this feature, the feature

will turn itself off.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 9.

22.Setup Send

9.Overseas Mode

Press

to select On (or

▲

▼

Off

Off).

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press1 if you want to choose more

settings and the LCD will return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings, and then go to

Step 5

Enter the fax number you’re calling.

Press Start.

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.

To send a single page,

press 2 (or press Start again).

The MFC starts sending the fax.

—OR—

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.

Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Set.

The MFC startsscanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat Steps 7 and

8 for each additional page).

6 - 18 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delayed Fax

During the day you can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent

within 24 hours. These faxes will be sent at the time of day you enter

in Step 3. Press Set to accept it, or enter another time for the faxes

to be sent.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 3.

Enter the time you want the fax to

be sent (in 24-hour format).

Press Set.

22.Setup Send

3.Delayed Fax

Set Time=00:00

Enter & Set Key

(For example, enter 19:45 for

7:45 PM.)

Press 1 if you want to choose more settings and the LCD will

return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press

Enter the fax number.

Press Start

2if you have finished choosing settings, and thengo to Step 5.

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.

To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again).

The MFC starts scanning the fax.

—OR—

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.

Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Set.

The MFC starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat Step 7

and 8 for each additional page).

The number of pages you can scan into the memory depends

on the amount of data that is printed on each page.

SETUP SEND 6 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delayed Batch Transmission

Before sending the delayed faxes, your MFC will help you economize

by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and scheduled

time. All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at the same

time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save

transmission time.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax).

Press Menu, 2, 2, 4.

22.Setup Send

4.Batch TX

Press

to select On (or

▲

Off

Off).

▼

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

6 - 20 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up Polled Transmission

Polled Transmission is when you set up your MFC to wait with a

paper original so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original that is going to be retrieved face up in the ADF, or face

down on the scanner glass.

Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.

22.Setup Send

6.Polled TX

Press

to choose On

▲

▼

Off

(or Off).

Press Set.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press 1if you want to choose more

settings and the LCD will return to the Setup Sendmenu.

—OR—

Press 2 if you have finished choosing settings, and go to step 5.

Press Start. The MFC starts scanning the document.

If you place the original in the ADF, wait for the fax to be polled.

—OR—

If you are using the scanner glass, go to Step 7.

To send a single page, press 2 (or press Start again), wait for

the fax to be polled.

—OR—

To send more than one page, press 1 and go to Step 8.

Place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Set.

The MFC starts scanning and returns to Step 7. (Repeat Step 7

and 8 for each additional page).

The document will be stored and can be retrieved from anyother

fax machine until you delete the fax in memory by using the

Cancelling a Job function. (See Canceling a scheduled job on

page 6-11.)

SETUP SEND 6 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Security

Memory Security lets you prevent unauthorized access to the MFC.

The MFC will not send faxes or print received faxes without the

password you program. You will not be able to continue to schedule

Delayed Faxesor Polling jobs. However, any pre-scheduled Delayed

Faxes will be sent when you turn Memory Security On, so they won't

be lost.

If Fax Storage is On before you turn Memory Security On, then Fax

Forwarding and Remote Retrieval will continue to work.

While Memory Security is On the following operations are available:

■ Receiving faxes into memory (limited by memory capacity)

■ Fax Forwarding (If Fax Storage was already On)

■ Remote Retrieval

To print the faxes in memory, turn Memory Security Off.

Setting up the password

If you forget the Memory Securitypassword, please call Brother

Customer Service. (See For Customer Servic e on page i.)

Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.

Enter a 4-digit number for the

password.

20.Miscellaneous

1.Mem Security

New Passwd=xxxx

Enter & Set Key

Press Set.

If you are entering the password for the first time, the LCD

shows Verify.

Re-enter the password.

Press Set.

6 - 22 SETUP SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turning Memory Security on

Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.

20.Miscellaneous

1.Mem Security

Press

to select Set

▲

Set Security

Set Password

Security.

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Enter the registered 4-digit password.

Press Set.

The MFC goes offline and the LCD shows Secure Mode.

If there is a power failure, the data in the memory will remain for

up to 4 days.

Turning Memory Security off

Press Menu.

Enter the registered 4-digit password and press Set.

Memory Security is automatically turned off and the LCD shows

the Date and Time.

If you enter the wrong Password, the LCD shows Wrong

Passwordand stays offline. The MFC will stay in Secure Mode

until the registered password is entered.

SETUP SEND 6 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Dial numbers and

dialing options

Storing numbers for easy dialing

You can set up your MFC to do three types of easy dialing:

One-Touch, Speed-Dial and Groups for Broadcasting faxes.

If you lose electrical power, the auto dialnumbers that are in the

memory will not be lost.

Storing One-Touch Dial numbers

Your MFC has 20 One-Touch keys where you

can store 40 fax or phone numbers for

automatic dialing. To access numbers 21 to 40,

hold down Shift as you press the One-Touch

key. When you pressa One-Touch key the LCD

shows the name, if you stored it, or the number. (See On e -Touch

Dialing on page 7-5.)

One-Touch keys are the 20 keys (numbers 01–40) located on the left

side of the control panel.

(For USA only) The Brother fax back system number has been

preprogrammed on One-Touch key 1.

Press Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Press the One-Touch key where

you want to store a number.

23.Set Auto Dial

1.One-Touch Dial

One-Touch:

Select One-Touch

If you have not installed the optional

LAN board (NC-9100h), go to Step 4.

—OR—

If you are using the MFC-8820DN or have installed the optional

LAN board (NC-9100h), the MFC will askyou if the One-Touch key

is for a fax/telephone number or an e-mail address. Go to Step 3.

Press

Fax/Tel.

Press Set.

to select

23.Set Auto Dial

*007

▲

Fax/Tel

▼

E-Address

Select ▲▼ & Set

AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter a number (up to 20 digits).

Press Set.

■

If youwant to enter a pause inthedialing sequence (for example, to access

an outside line), pressRedial/Pause as you are entering the digits.

Each key press ofRedial/Pause enters a 3.5 second pause when the

number is dialed, and a dash appears on the screen.

Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).

Press Set.

(You can use the chart on page 4-3 to help you enter letters.)

—OR—

Press Set to store the number without a name.

Go to Step 2 to store another One-Touch number

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

When you dial an auto dial number, the LCD shows the name

and numberyou’ve stored, or, if you haven’t stored a name, only

the number you’ve stored.

Storing Speed-Dial numbers

You can store Speed-Dialnumbers, so that when you dial you will only

have to press a few keys (Search/Speed Dial

#, the three-digit

number, and Start). The MFC can store 300 Speed-Dial numbers.

Press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

23.Set Auto Dial

2.Speed-Dial

Use the dial pad to enter a

three-digit Speed-Dial number

(001-300).

Speed-Dial? #

Enter & Set Key

(For example, press 005.)

Press Set.

If you have not installed the optional LAN board (NC-9100h), go

to Step 4.

—OR—

If you are using the MFC-8820DN or have installed the optional

LAN board (NC-9100h), the MFC will askyou if the Speed-Dial is

for a fax/telephone number or an e-mail address. Go to Step 3.

Press

Fax/Tel.

Press Set.

to select

23.Set Auto Dial

#100

▲

Fax/Tel

▼

E-Address

Select ▲▼ & Set

7 - 2 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter the phone or fax number (up to 20 digits).

Press Set.

Use the dial pad to enter the name (up to 15 characters).

Press Set.

(You can use the chart on page 4-3 to help you enter letters.)

—OR—

Press Set to store the number without a name.

Go to Step 2 to store another Speed-Dial number.

—OR—

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers

If you try to store a One-Touch or Speed-Dial number where a

number has already been stored, the LCD will show the name that

has been stored there (or number) and will ask you to do one of the

following:

Press 1 to change the stored

23.Set Auto Dial

*005:MIKE

number.

▲

1.Change

2.Exit

—OR—

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press 2 to exit without making a

change.

Enter a new number.

Press Set.

■ To erase the whole number or whole name, press

Clear/Black repeatedlyuntil all digits or letters are deleted.

To erase one digit or letter, use

cursor under it, and then press Clear/Black.

■ If you want to insert characters, use or to position the

to position the

cursor where you want to insert them, and then type.

Follow the directions beginning at Step 4 in Storing One-Touch

Dial numbers and Storing Speed-Dial numbers.(See Storing

One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1 and Storing Speed-Dial

num b e rs on page 7-2.)

AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up Groups for Broadcasting

Groups, which can be stored on a One-Touch key or a Speed-Dial

location, allow you to send the same fax message to many fax

numbers by pressing only a One-Touch key and Start or

Search/Speed Dial, #, the three-digit location and Start.

First, you'll need to store each fax number as a One-Touch or

Speed-Dial number. Then, you can combine them into a Group,

Each Group uses up a One-Touch key or a Speed-Dial location.

Finally, you can have up to six small Groups, or you can assign up to

339 numbers to one large Group.

(See St o r i ng Speed-Dial number s on page 7-2 and Changing

On e -Touch and Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-3.)

Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.

Decide where you wish to store the

Group

23.Set Auto Dial

3.Setup Groups

Group Dial:

Press Speed-Dial...

—AND—

Press a One-Touch key

—OR—

Press Search/Speed Dial and enter the three-digit location,

and then press Set.

(For example, press One-Touch key 2 for Group 1.)

Use the dial pad to enter the Group

number.

23.Set Auto Dial

*002

Press Set.

(For example, press 1 for Group 1.)

To include One-Touch or Speed-Dial numbers in the Group,

enter them as if you were dialing.

Group#:0

Enter No. & Set

For example, for One-Touch key 05, press One-Touch key 05.

For Speed-Dial location 009, press Search/Speed Dial, then

press 009 on the dial pad. The LCD shows 005, #009.

Press Set to accept the numbers for this Group.

Use the dial pad and the chart on page 4-3 to enter a name for

the Group.

Press Set.

(For example, NEW CLIENTS)

7 - 4 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press Stop/Exit.

You can print a list of all One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers.

(See P r i nting reports on pa g e 9 -3.) Group numbers will be

marked in the column of 'Group'.

Dialing options

When you dial using an auto dial number, the LCD shows the

name you’ve stored, or if you haven’t stored a name, the fax

number you’ve stored.

You can search for names you have stored in the One-Touch and

Speed-Dial memory.

(See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1 and s ee Storing

Speed-Dial numbers on page 7-2.)

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Search/Speed Dial.

Press

To search alphabetically through the names that are stored, enter

the first letter of the name you’re looking for and press

—OR—

Press

To search for numbers numerically, press

When the LCD shows the name you want to call,

Press Start.

One-Touch Dialing

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press the One-Touch key of the location you want to call.

Press Start.

AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed-Dialing

If it is not illuminated in green, press

(Fax). Place the

original face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Press Search/Speed Dial, #, and then the three-digit

Speed-Dial number. (See Storing Sp e e d-Dial numbers on page

7 -2.)

Press Start.

If you try to use a One-Touch or Speed-Dial location with no

number stored in it, you hear a warning sound, and LCD shows

Not Registered. The LCD returns to normal after 2 seconds.

Manual dialing

Manual dialing means pressing all of the digits of the phone number.

Using an external telephone

The easiest way to use your external telephone is to pick up the

handset and dial the number on the external telephone as you

normally would.

Pick up the handset of the external telephone.

Dial the number on the external telephone.

To hang up, replace the handset.

7 - 6 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Access codes and credit card numbers

Sometimes you may want to choose from several long distance

carriers when you make a call. Rates may vary depending on the time

and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the

access codes or long-distance carriers and credit card numbers as

One-Touch and Speed-Dial numbers. You can store these long

dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up on separate

keys in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using

the dial pad.

The combined number will be dialed in the order that you entered it

as soon as you press Start.

(See Storing One-Touch Dial numbers on page 7-1.)

For example, you can store ‘555’ on One-Touch key 03 and ‘7000’

on One-Touch key 02. If you press One-Touch key 03, One-Touch

key 02, and Start, you will dial ‘555-7000’.

To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the

number with manual dialing using the dial pad.

For example, to change the number to 555-7001 you could press

One-Touch key 03 and then press 7001 using the dialing pad.

If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the

dialing sequence, store a pause there in the number by pressing

Redial/Pause. Each key press adds a 3.5-second delay.

AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS 7 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pause

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second pause between

numbers. If you are dialing overseas, you can press Redial/Pause

as many times as needed to increase the length of the pause.

Tone or Pulse (Canada only)

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need to send Tone signals

(for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below. If

you have Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send

tone signals.

Lift the handset of an external phone.

Press# on the control panel of your MFC. Any digits dialed after

this will send tone signals.

When you hang up, the MFC will return to the Pulse dialing

service.

7 - 8 AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND DIALING OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Fax Options

Fax Forwarding/Paging

You cannot use Paging and Fax Forwarding at the same time.

After you have selected the Paging or Fax Forwarding feature,

Fax Storage is set to On automatically.

Programming a Fax Forwarding number

When Fax Forwarding is set to On, your MFC stores the received fax

in the memory. Then it dials the fax number you’ve programmed and

forwards the fax message.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.

25.Remote Fax Opt

1.Fax Fwd/Paging

Press

to select Fax

▲

Off

Forward.

▼

Fax Forward

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

The LCD will ask you to enter the fax number to which faxes will

be forwarded.

Enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits).

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming your pager number

When Paging is selected, your MFC dials the pager number you’ve

programmed, and then dials your Personal Identification Number

(PIN). This activates your pager so you will know that you have a fax

message in the memory.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.

25.Remote Fax Opt

1.Fax Fwd/Paging

Press

to select

▲

Off

Paging.

Press Set.

▼

Fax Forward

Select ▲▼ & Set

Enter your pager phone number followed by # # (up to 20 digits).

Press Set.

Do not include the area code if it is the same as that of your MFC.

For example, press 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 1 2 # #.

If your pager needs a PIN, enter the PIN, press #, press

Redial/Pause,

enter your fax number followed by # #.

Press Set.

(For example, press 1 2 3 4 5 # Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5

1 2 1 2 # #)

—OR—

If you do not need a PIN, press Redial/Pause, enter your fax

number followed by # #.

Press Set.

(For example, press Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 1 2 # #)

Press Stop/Exit.

You cannot change a Paging number or PIN remotely.

8 - 2 REMOTE FAX OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Fax Storage

If you set Fax Storage to ON, you will be able to retrieve fax

messages from another location using Fax Forwarding, Paging, or

Remote Retrieval operations. If there is paper in your MFC, a

back-up copy of each fax will be printed. The LCD will show when

you have a fax stored in memory.

Press Menu, 2, 5, 2.

The LCD will ask you to choose a

fax setting.

25.Remote Fax Opt

2.Fax Storage

▲

▼

Off

Press

to select On(or Select ▲▼ & Set

Off).

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

If there are faxes in the memory when you turn Fax Storage

OFF, the LCD will ask if you want to erase the faxes in the

memory.

If you press 1, all fax data is erased and Fax Storage is turned off.

If you press 2, faxes are not erased and Fax Storage stays on.

(See Printing a fax from the memory on page 5-5.)

■ After you have selected Paging or Fax Forwarding feature,

Fax Storage is set to Onautomatically. If you bring Paging or

Fax Forwarding feature back to Off, Fax Storage stays on.

■ If there is a power failure, the data in the memorywill remain

for up to 4 days.

REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting your Remote Access Code

The remote access code lets you access the Remote Retrieval

features when you are away from your MFC. Before you use the

remote access and retrieval features, you have to set up your own

code. The default code is inactive code (--- ).

Press Menu, 2, 5, 3.

Enter a three-digit code using

25.Remote Fax Opt

3.Remote Access

numbers 0-9,

or #.

Access Code:---*

PressSet. (The preset ‘ ’ cannot Enter & Set key

be changed.)

Do not use the same digits that appear in your Fax Receive

Code( 51) or Telephone Answer Code (#51).( S e e Operation

from extension telephones on page 5-7.)

Press Stop/Exit.

■ You can change your code at any time by entering a new

one. If you want to make your code inactive, press

Clear/Back in Step 2 to restore the inactive setting (--- ).

8 - 4 REMOTE FAX OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Retrieval

You can call your MFC from any telephone or fax machine using

touch tone, then use the Remote Access Code and remote

commands to retrieve fax messages. Be sure to cut out the Remote

Retrieval Access Card on the last page and keep it with you at all

times.

Using your Remote Access Code

Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine

using touch tone.

When your MFC answers, immediately enter your Remote

Access Code (3 digits followed by ).

The MFC signals if it has received fax messages:

1 long beep — Fax messages

No beeps — No fax messages

The MFC gives two short beeps, which tells you to enter a

command. The MFC will hang up if you wait longer than 30

seconds to enter a command. The MFC will beep three times, if

you enter an invalid command.

Press 90 to reset the MFC when you’ve finished.

Hang up.

If your MFC is set to Manualmode and you want to use the

remote retrieval features, you can access your MFC by waiting

about 2 minutes after it starts ringing, and then entering the

Remote Access Code within 30 seconds.

REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote commands

Follow the commands below to access features when you are away

from the MFC. When you call the MFC and enter your Remote

Access Code (3 digits followed by ), the system will give two short

beeps and you must enter a remote command.

Remote commands

Operation details

95 Changethe FaxForwarding

or Paging settings

1 OFF

If you hear one long beep, the change has

been accepted. If you hearthree short beeps,

you cannot change it because the conditions

have not been met (forexample, registering a

fax forwarding or paging number). You can

entering 4. (See Changing your Fax

2 Fax Forwarding

3 Paging

4 Fax Forwarding number

Forwarding number on page 8-7). Once you

have registered the number, Fax Forwarding

will be set to On.

6 Fax Storage ON

You can turn Fax Storage to On(or Off

after you have retrieved or erased all your

messages).

7 Fax Storage OFF

96 Retrieve a fax

2 Retrieve all faxes

Enter the number of a remote fax machine to

receive stored fax messages. (S ee Retrieving

fax message s on page 8-7.)

3 Erase faxes from the

memory

If you hear one long beep, you can erase fax

messages from the memory.

97 Check the receiving status

1 Fax

You can check whether your MFC has

received any faxes. If it has, you will hear one

long beep. Ifit hasn’t, youwill hearthree short

beeps.

98 Change the Receive Mode

1 External TAD

2 Fax/Tel

If you hear one long beep, you can change

the Receive Mode.

3 Fax Only

90 Exit

After a long beep, you can exit Remote

Retrieval.

8 - 6 REMOTE FAX OPTIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Retrieving fax messages

Dial your fax number.

When your MFC answers, immediately enter your Remote

Access Code (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long

beep, you have messages.

As soon as you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press

962.

Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the

number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax

messages sent to followed by ## (up to 20 digits).

You cannot use

you want to store a pause.

and # as dial numbers. However, press # if

Hang up after you hear your MFC beep. Your MFC will call the

other machine, which will then print your fax messages.

Changing your Fax Forwarding number

You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number

from another telephone or fax machine using Touch Tone.

Dial your fax number.

When your MFC answers, immediately enter your Remote

Access Code (3 digits followed by ). If you hear one long

beep, you have messages.

When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 954.

Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the

new number of the remote faxmachine where you want your fax

messages forwarded followed by ## (up to 20 digits).

You cannot use

you want to store a pause.

and # as dial numbers. However, press # if

Hang up after you hear your MFC beep.

REMOTE FAX OPTIONS 8 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing reports

MFC settings and activity

You need to set up the Transmission Verification Report and Activity

Report Interval in the menu table.

24.Setup Reports

Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.

—OR—

1.Transmission

2.Act.Interval

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.

Customizing the

Transmission Verification Report

You can use the Transmission Report as proof that you sent a fax.

This report lists the time and date of transmission and whether the

transmission was successful(OK). If you select Onor On+Image, the

report will print for every fax you send.

If you send a lot of faxes to the same place, you may need more than

the job numbers to know which faxes you must send again. Selecting

On+Imageor Off+Imagewill print a section of the fax’s first page

on the report to help you remember.

When the feature is Off, the Report will only print it there is a

transmission error. (NG).

Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.

Press or to select Off,

Off+Image, ON or On+Image.

Press Set.

24.Setup Reports

1.Transmission

▲

Off

▼

Off+Image

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

PRINTING REPORTS 9 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the Fax Activity Report Interval

You can set the MFC to print activityreportsat specificintervals(every

50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval to Off,

you can print the report by following the Steps on the next page.

The default setting is Every 50 Faxes.

24.Setup Reports

Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.

Press or to choose an

interval. Press Set.

(If you choose 7 days, the LCD will

ask you to choose a day on which

to begin the 7-day countdown.)

2.Act.Interval

Every 50 Faxes

Every 6 hours

▲

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Enter the time to begin printing in 24-hour format.

Press Set.

(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

Press Stop/Exit.

If you select 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the MFC will print the

report at the selected time and then erase all jobs from its

memory. If the MFC’s memory becomes full with 200 jobs

before the time you selected has passed, the MFC will print the

Activity Report early and then erase alljobs from memory. If you

want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it

without erasing the jobs from memory.

If you select Every 50 Faxes, the MFC will print the Activity

Report when the MFC has stored 50 jobs.

9 - 2 PRINTING REPORTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing reports

Five reports are available:

Prints the Help List so you can see at-a-glance

how to quickly program your MFC.

1.Help List

Lists names and numbers stored in the

One-Touch and Speed-Dial memory, in numerical

order.

2.Auto Dial

Lists information about the last incoming and

outgoing faxes.

3.Fax Activity

(TX means Transmit.) (RX means Receive.)

Prints a Transmission Verification Report for your

last transmission.

4.Transmission

5.User Settings

To print a report

Lists your settings.

Press Menu, 5.

Press

to select the report you want.

Press Set.

—OR—

Enter the number of the report you want to print.

For example, press 1 to print the Help List.

Press Start.

PRINTING REPORTS 9 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making copies

Using the MFC as a copier

You can use your MFC as a copier, making up to 99 copies at a time.

Enter Copy mode

Before making copies, make sure that

(Copy) is illuminated

in green. If it is not, press (Copy) to enter Copy mode. The

default setting is Fax. You can change the number of seconds or

minutes that the MFC stays in Copy mode after a copy operation.

(

See S e tting the Mode Timer on page 4-5.)

The printable area of your MFC begins at approximately 0.14 in.

(3.64 mm) from both sides and 0.12 in. (3 mm) from the top or bottom

of the paper.

Ex: Letter (Original)

Letter (Paper)

0.14" (3.64mm)

Unprintable

area

0.12" (3mm)

MAKING COPIES 10 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Temporary copy settings

You can improve your copies by using the Temporary Copy Keys:

Enlarge/Reduce, Contrast, Quality, Tray Select, Sort and

N in 1 (For MFC-8420) or Duplex/N in 1 (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN). These settings are temporary, and the MFC returns

to Fax mode 1 minute after it finishes copying. If you want to use

these temporary settings again, place the next original in the ADF or

on the scanner glass within that time. However, if you have set the

Mode Timer for Copy and Scan modes to 0 to 30 seconds, the MFC

returns to the default settings after the number of seconds that has

been set for Mode Timer. (See Setting the Mode Timer on page 4-5

and see U s ing the copy keys (Te m p orary settings) on page 10-6.)

Temporary Copy Keys

While the MFC is copying, incoming faxes will be received into

the memory instead of being printed.

10 - 2 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Making a single copy from the ADF

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF.

Press Start.

Do NOT pull on the original while copying is in progress.

To stop copying and eject the original, press Stop/Exit.

Making multiple copies from the ADF

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Insert the original

face up in the ADF.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want (up to

99).

Press Start.

To sort the copies, press the Sort key.

MAKING COPIES 10 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Single or multiple copies using the scanner glass

You can make multiple copies using the scanner glass. Multiple copies

will be stacked (all copies of page 1, then all copies of page 2, and so

on). Use the Temporary Copykeys to choose more settings. (See U s i n g

t h e copy keys (Temporary settings) on page 10-6.)

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Lift the Document

Cover.

Place the originals

Face Down on the

Scanner Glass

Document

Guidelines

Using the document guidelines on the left, center the original

face down on the scanner glass and close the document cover.

Using the dial pad, enter the number of copies you want (up to

99).

For example, press 3 8 for 38 copies.

Press Start.

The MFC will start scanning the original.

If you want to sort multiple copies, use the ADF.

(See Making a single copy from the ADF on page 10-3.)

10 - 4 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Out of Memory message

If the memory becomes full while you

are making copies, the LCD message

will guide you through the next step.

Out of Memory

Copy:Press Start

Quit:Press Stop

If the Out Of Memorymessage

appears, press Stop/Exit to cancel or

Startto copy scanned pages. You will need to clear some jobs from

the memory before you can continue.

To gain extra memory, you can turn off Fax Storage.

(See Setting Fax Storage on page 8-3.)

—OR—

Print the faxes that are in the memory. (S e e Printing a fax from

the memory on page 5-5.)

When you get an Out Of Memory message, you may be able to

make copies if you first print incoming faxes in the memory to restore

the memory to 100%.

Then if this error message appears more than once you may

wish to consider increasing the memory size. For more

information on how to increase the memory size, See Mem o r y

board on page 23-1.

MAKING COPIES 10 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the copy keys

(Temporary settings)

When you want to change the settings only for the next copy, use the

Temporary Copy Keys.

Temporary Copy keys

You can use different combinations. The large LCD shows your

current Copy mode settings.

Enlg/Red:100%

Duplex N in 1

Quality :Auto

Contrast:-

Tray

:#1(LTR)

Press▲▼ or Start

Example of Copy mode LCD

10 - 6 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enlarge/Reduce

You can select the following enlargement or reduction ratios.

Autosets the MFC to calculate the reduction ratio that fits the size

of your paper.

Customallows you to enter a ratio from 25% to 400%.

Press Enlarge/Reduce 100%

104% (EXE → LTR)

141% (A5 → A4)

200%

Auto

Custom (25 - 400%)

50%

70% (A4 → A5)

78% (LGL → LTR)

83% (LGL → A4)

85% (LTR → EXE)

91% (Full Page)

94% (A4 → LTR)

97% (LTR → A4)

Autoappears only when you place the original in the ADF.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Enlarge/Reduce.

Press Enlarge/Reduce or

Enlg/Red:100%

Quality :Auto

Contrast:-

Tray

:#1(LTR)

MAKING COPIES 10 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press

to select the enlargement or reduction ratio

you want.

Press Set.

—OR—

You can select Custom and press Set.

Use the dial pad to enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from

25%to 400%.

Press Set.

(For example, press 5 3 to enter 53%.)

Press Start.

—OR—

Press other temporary copy keys for more settings.

■ Special CopyOptions(2in1, 4in1 or Poster) are not available

with Enlarge/Reduce.

■ Autois not available with the scanner glass.

Quality (type of original)

You can select the Quality for your type of original. The default

setting is Auto, which is used for originals that contain both text and

photographs. Textis used for originalscontaining onlytext. Photo is

used for copying photographs.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Quality.

Press

to choose the type of original (Auto, Textor

Photo).

Press Set.

Press Start.

—OR—

Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.

10 - 8 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sorting copies using the ADF

If you want to sort multiple copies, use the ADF. Pageswill be printed

in the order 123, 123, 123, and so on.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Sort.

Press Start.

—OR—

Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.

Contrast

You can adjust copy contrast to make copies darker or lighter.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Contrast.

Press

to make a copy lighter

—OR—

Press

to make a copy darker.

Press Set.

Press Start.

—OR—

Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.

Press Contrast

MAKING COPIES 10 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tray Select

You can change the tray use only for the next copy.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Tray Select.

Press

to select the tray usage.

Press Set.

Press Start.

—OR—

Press other Temporary Copy keys for more settings.

(For MFC-8420 with the optional paper tray #2)

Press Tray Select Auto

#1 (XXX)*

#2 (XXX)*

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN with the optional paper tray #2)

Press Tray Select Auto

#1 (XXX)*

#2 (XXX)*

MP Tray

* XXX is the paper size you set in Menu, 1. 3.

For MFC-8420 the LCD displays the tray use selections only if

the optional paper tray is installed.

10 - 10 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplex/N in 1

‘Duplex’ prints on both sides of the paper.

Temporary

key

Level 1

Level 2

Option

original

Finished Layout

Press

N in 1

—

2 in 1 (P)

Duplex/N in 1

(MFC-8820D/

8820DN)

N in 1

(MFC-8420)

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

—

Duplex(1 in 1)

(MFC-8820D/

8820DN)

Portrait1

Portrait2

Single Sided

Double Sided

Single Sided

Double Sided

—

Landscape1

Landscape2

Duplex(2 in 1)

(MFC-8820D/

8820DN)

—

Portrait1

Portrait2

Landscape1

Landscape2

Portrait1

Portrait2

Landscape1

Landscape2

Duplex(4 in 1)

(MFC-8820D/

8820DN)

—

Poster

Off

—

MAKING COPIES 10 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplex/N in 1 copy

N in 1 copy

You can save paper by copying either two or four pages onto one

page. Please make sure paper size is set to A4, Letteror Legal.

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Duplex/N in 1.

Press Set to select N in 1.

Press

1(P)or 4 in 1(L).

to select 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L), 4 in

Press Set.

If you are ready to copy, go to Step 7.

Enlg/Red:100%

Quality :Auto

Contrast:-

—OR—

Press

to select

Tray

:#1(LTR)

Quality, Contrastor Tray.

Press Set.

Press▲▼ or Start

Press or

Press Set.

Press Start.

to select a new setting.

If you are using the ADF, the MFC scans the originals and prints

the copies.

—OR—

If you are using the scanner glass,

the MFC scans the page. Place

the next original on the scanner

glass.

Flatbed Copy:

Next Page?

▲ 1.Yes

▼ 2.No

Select ▲▼ & Set

Select 1and press Set, or press 1,

to copy next page.

Repeat Step 7 and 8 for each page of the layout.

10 After all the pages of the original have been scanned,

select 2 and press Set, or press 2, to print the copies.

10 - 12 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(P) means Portrait and (L) means Landscape.

You can also combine the N in 1 and Duplex operations. (See

Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1) (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN) on page 10-15.)

For 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L), 4 in 1(P) or 4 in 1 (L), you

can not use the Enlarge/Reduce setting.

Poster

You can make a poster

size copy of a

photograph. You must

use the scanner glass.

Place the original face

down on the scanner glass.

Press Duplex/N in 1 and

Press Set.

Press Start.

The MFC starts scanning the original and prints the pages for

the poster.

to select Poster.

For Poster copies, you cannot make more than one copy or use

the Enlarge/Reduce setting.

Duplex (1 in 1) (For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

Make a double-sided copy from a single-sided original

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down the scanner glass.

Use the dialpad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).

Press Duplex/N in 1and

Press Set.

to select Duplex(1 in 1).

MAKING COPIES 10 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press

Landscape1or Landscape2.

Press or to select Single Sidedfor the original (If

you are using the scannerglass or changed the number of copies

at Step 2, this option will not appear).

to select Portrait1, Portrait2,

Press Set.

Press Start to scan the original.

If you placed the original in the ADF, the MFC starts printing.

—OR—

If you placed the original on the scanner glass, go to Step 7.

Select 1 and press Set or press 1 to copy next page.

After all the pages of the original have been scanned, select

pressSet, or press

and

Make a double-sided copy from a double-sided original

(Not available for multiple copies)

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF.

Press Duplex/Nin 1and

Press Set.

to select Duplex(1in 1)

Press

to select Portrait2or Landscape1.

to select Double Sidedfor the original.

Press Set.

Press

Press Set.

Make sure that you have put the original in the ADF as shown

on the LCD and press Start.

After all the pages of the original have been scanned on one

side, turn the other side of the original face up in the ADF.

Press Start.

10 - 14 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplex (2 in 1) and Duplex (4 in 1)

(For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

Press

(Copy) to illuminate it in green. Place the original

face up in the ADF, or face down on the scanner glass.

Use the dial pad to enter the number of copies you want

(up to 99).

Press Duplex/N in 1 and

1) or Duplex(4 in 1)

to select Duplex(2 in

Press Set.

Press

to select Portrait1, Portrait2,

Landscape1or Landscape2.

Press Set.

Press Start to scan the original.

If you placed the original in the ADF, the MFC starts printing.

—OR—

If you placed the original on the scanner glass, go to Step 6.

Place the next original on the scanner glass.

Select 1 and press Set or press 1 to copy next page.

After all the pages of the original have been scanned, select 2

and press Set or press 2.

MAKING COPIES 10 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the default copy settings

You can adjust the copy settings that are shown in the chart. These

settings will stay until you change them again.

Submenu

Menu Selections

Options

Text

Factory Settings

1.Quality

—

Auto

Photo

Auto

2.Contrast

—

Quality

Press Menu, 3, 1.

Press or

Photoor Auto.

Press Set.

31.Quality

▲

Auto

Text

Photo

to select Text,

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Stop/Exit.

Contrast

You can change the contrast to help an image look lighter or darker.

Press Menu, 3, 2.

32.Contrast

Press

to make lighter.

—OR—

Select

& Set

Press

to make darker.

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

10 - 16 MAKING COPIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the MFC as a printer

Using the Brother MFC-8420,

MFC-8820D or MFC-8820DN printer

driver

A Printer Driver is software that translates data from the format used

by a computer into the format required by a particular printer, using

a printer command language or page description language.

The printer drivers are on the CD-ROM we have supplied. Install the

drivers first byfollowing the Quick Setup Guide. Also, the latest printer

driver can be downloaded from the Brother Solutions Center at:

h t t p ://solutions.brother.com

Windows^®Printing

The dedicated printer driver and TrueType^™compatible fonts for

Microsoft^®Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and

Windows NT^®workstation 4.0 are available on the CD-ROM

supplied with your MFC. You can install them easily into your

Windows^®system using our installer program. The driver supports

our unique compression mode to enhance printing speed in

Windows^®applications, and allows you to set various printer

settings, including economy printing mode and custom paper size.

Popular Printer Emulation Support

The MFC supports HP LaserJet (PCL level 6) and BR-Script 3

(PostScript^®3^™) printer emulation mode. If you use DOS application

software, you can use HP LaserJet (PCL level 6) and BR-Script 3

(PostScript^®3^™) emulation mode for printer operations.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to print your document

When the MFC receives data from your computer, it begins printing

by picking up paper from the paper tray. The paper tray can feed

many types of paper and envelopes.

From your computer select the Print command.

If your computer is also connected to any other printers, select

Brother MFC-8420 or MFC-8820D (USB) Printer as your

printer driver from the Print or Print Settings menu in your

software application, and then click on OK to begin printing.

Your computer sends a print command and data to the MFC.

The LED blinks in yellow and the MFC starts to print.

You can select the paper size, and orientation in your

application software.

If your application software does not support your custom paper size,

select the next largest paper size.

Then adjust the print area by changing the right and left margins in

your application software.

11 - 2 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simultaneous printing and faxing

Your MFC can print from your computer while sending or receiving a

fax, and scanning the original into the computer. Fax sending will not

be stopped during PC printing.

Two-sided printing (Duplex Printing)

The supplied printer driver supports duplex printing. (For more

information, see Duplex Printing on page 12-7.)

Automatic Duplex Printing (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

In this mode, the MFC prints on both sides of the A4, Letter or

Legalpaper automatically.

Open the Properties dialog box in the printer driver.

Select Duplex Printing mode in the Advanced tab, make sure

that ‘Use Duplex Unit’ has been selected, and then clickthe OK

button. (See Duplex Printing on page 12-7.) The printer will print

on both sides of the paper automatically.

■ When you select Use Duplex Unit, HQ1200 is not available.

■ If you also want to use Duplex Printing for fax and copy

operations, see To use Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy

and p r i nt operation s (Fo r M F C-8820D and MFC-8820DN )on

page 2-10.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual Duplex Printing

The MFC prints all the

even-numbered pages on one

side of the paper first.

Then, the Windows^®driver

instructs you (with a pop-up

message) to reinsert the paper.

Before reinserting the paper,

straighten it well, or you may get

a paper jam. Very thin or very

thick paper is not recommended.

We recommend 75 to 90 g/m²(20 to 24 lb) paper.

Face-down output tray

The MFC ejects paper with printed surfaces face down into the

output tray in the front of the MFC. Unfold the support flap to support

the printed pages.

When printing transparencies, remove each one from the

support flap after it exits the MFC.

Support Flap

with Extension

11 - 4 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing on plain paper

The manual feed tray (For MFC-8420)

The MFC automatically turns on the Manual Feed mode when

you put paper in the manual feed tray.

Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other

settings in the printer driver.

Media Type: Plain Paper

Paper Source: Manual

Send the print data to the MFC.

Open the manual feed tray. Slide the paper guides to fit the

paper size.

Using both hands put paper in the manual feed tray until the

front edge of the paper touches the paper feed roller and the

MFC grips the paper.

■ Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper

position on the manual feed tray. If it is not, the paper may

not be fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper

jam.

■ Do not put more than one piece of paper in the manual feed

tray at any one time, or it may cause a jam.

After the printed page comes out of the MFC, put in the next

sheet of paper as in Step 4 above. Repeat for each page that

you want to print.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The MP tray (For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

The MFC automatically turns on the MP Tray mode when you

put paper in the multi-purpose tray.

Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other

settings in the printer driver.

Media Type: Plain Paper

Paper Source: MP Tray

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Pull out the MP tray support flap.

When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the

back of the tray.

Paper-guide

Release Lever

Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position

on the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,

resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.

While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper

guide to fit the paper size.

When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the

following:

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the

MFC.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it

gently into the tray.

Send the print data to the MFC.

11 - 6 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing on thicker paper and card stock

When the back output tray is pulled down, the MFC has a straight

paper path from the manual feed tray or the MP tray through to the

back of the MFC. Use this paper feed and output method when you

want to print on thicker paper or card stock.

The manual feed tray (For MFC-8420)

Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other

settings in the printer driver.

Media Type: Thick paper or Thicker paper

Paper Source: Manual

Open the back output tray.

Open the manual feed tray. Slide the paper guides to fit the

paper size.

Using both hands put the paper in the manual feed tray until the

front edge of the paper touches the paper feed roller and the

MFC grips the paper.

■ Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper

position in the manual feed tray. If it isnot, the paper may not

be fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper

jam.

■ Do not put more than one piece of paper in the manual feed

tray at any one time, or it may cause a jam.

Send the print data to the MFC.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After the printed page comes out of the MFC, put in the next

sheet of paper as in Step 4 above. Repeat for each page that

you want to print.

When you have finished the print job, close the back output tray.

Caution

Remove each sheet immediately after printing. Stacking the sheets

may cause a paper jam or the paper to curl.

11 - 8 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The multi-purpose tray (MP tray) (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other

settings in the printer driver.

Media Type: Thick paper or Thicker paper

Paper Source: MP Tray

Open the back output tray, and then pull out the face-up output

tray support if necessary.

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Pull out the MP tray support flap.

When putting paper in the MP tray, make sure it touches the

back of the tray.

Make sure that the paper is straight and in the proper position in

the MP tray. If it is not, the paper may not be fed properly,

resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.

While pressing the paper-guide release lever, slide the paper

guide to fit the paper size.

When you put paper in the MP tray, please remember the

following;

■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed paper into the

MFC.

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the paper) in first and push it

gently into the tray.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Send the print data to the MFC.

When you have finished the print job, close the back output tray.

Caution

Remove each sheet immediately after printing. Stacking the sheets

may cause a paper jam or the paper to curl.

11 - 10 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing on envelopes

To print on envelopes use manual feed tray or multi-purpose tray.

■ The MFC automatically turns on the Manual Feed mode

when you put paper in the manual feed tray.

■ All sides should be properly folded without any wrinkles or

creases.

Select the Paper Size, Media Type, Paper Source, and other

settings in the printer driver.

Media Type: Envelope, Env.thin or Env.thick

For MFC-8420:

Open the back output tray.

Open the manual feed tray. Slide the paper guides to fit the

envelope size.

If envelopes are creased after they have been printed:

At the back of the MFC, open the back output tray and push

down the blue tabs at the left and right hand sides (as shown in

the figure on the next page). When you have finished printing

your envelopes, close the back output tray to reset the two blue

tabs back to their original position.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using both hands put the envelope in the manual feed tray until

the front edge of the envelope touches the paper feed roller.

Hold the envelope in this position until the MFC automatically

feeds it in for a short distance, and then let go of the envelope.

■ Make sure the envelope is straight as you insert it in the

manual feed tray. If it is not, the envelope may not be fed

properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a jam.

■ Do not put more than one envelope in the manual feed tray

at any one time, or it may cause a jam.

■ Put the envelope in the manual feed tray, making sure that

the side to be printed on is face up in the tray.

11 - 12 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After the printed envelope comes out of the MFC, the MFC will

wait until you put in the next envelope. Repeat Step 4 for each

envelope you want to print.

Send the print data to the MFC.

After you finish the print job, close the back output tray.

For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN:

Open the back output tray, and then unfold the face-up output

tray support if necessary.

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Pull out the MP tray support flap.

If envelopes are creased after they have been printed:

At the back of the MFC, open the back output tray and push

down the blue tabs at the left and right hand sides (as shown in

the figure on the next page). When you have finished printing

your envelopes, close the back output tray to reset the two blue

tabs back to their original position.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Put the envelopes in the MP tray so that they touch the back of

the tray. Do not put more than 3 envelopes in the MP tray at any

one time, or it may cause a jam.

Make sure that the envelopes are neatly stacked and in the

properposition in the MPtray. If they are not, the envelopes may

not be fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout or a jam.

11 - 14 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Press and slide the paper-width guide to fit the envelope size.

When you put envelopes in the MP tray, please remember the

following;

■ During printing, the inside tray rises to feed envelopes into

the MFC.

■ The side to be printed on must be face up.

■ Put the leading edge (top of the envelope) in first and push

it gently into the tray.

Send the print data to the MFC.

After you finish the print job, close the back output tray.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer operation keys

Job Cancel

You can clear data from the memory.

Secure key

Secured data is password protected. Only those people that know

the password will be able to print the data. The MFC will not print

secure data until the password is entered. After the document is

printed, the data will be cleared from the memory. To use this

function, you need to set your password in the printer driver dialog

box. (See Device Options on page 12-11.)

The Secure Key function is not available when using the Brother

BR-Script driver.

Press Secure.

—OR—

The LCD displays No Data!if there is no secured data in the

memory.

Press

user name.

to select the

Secure Print

User?

▲ MIKE

Press Set. The LCD displays job

selections.

▼ ANDY

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

job.

to select the

Secure Print

Job?

▲ Test1

▼ Test2

Press Set. The LCD prompts you

to enter your four-digit password.

Select ▲▼ & Set

11 - 16 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter your password using the

control panel.

Secure Print

Test1

Press Set.

Password:XXXX

Enter & Set Key

Press

to select

Print.

Press Set. The MFC prints the data.

—OR—

If you want to delete the secured data press

select Delete.

Press Stop/Exit.

■ If you turn the power switch Off, the secured data saved in

memory will be cleared.

■ After you print the secured data it will be cleared from

memory.

Setting the Emulation Selection

This MFC has an Automatic Emulation Selection function. When the

MFC receives information from the PC, it automatically chooses the

emulation mode. This function has been set at the factory to AUTO.

You can change the default emulation mode manually by using the

control panel.

Press Menu, 4, 1.

Press or

HP Laser Jetor BR-Script3.

41.Emulation

▲

Auto

to select Auto,

HP LaserJet

BS-Script 3

▼

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press Stop/Exit.

Try this function with your application software or network

server. If the function does not work properly, either select the

required emulation mode manually using the MFC panelbuttons

or use the emulation selection commands in your software.

USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER 11 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing the Internal Font List

You can print a list of the MFC’s internal (or resident) fonts to see

how each font looks before you select it.

Press Menu, 4, 2, 1.

Press Start. The MFC prints the

list.

42.Print Options

1.Internal Font

Press Start

Press Stop/Exit.

Printing the Print Configuration List

You can print a list of current printer settings.

Press Menu, 4, 2, 2.

Press Start. The MFC prints the

settings.

42.Print Options

2.Configuration

Press Start

Press Stop/Exit.

Restoring factory default settings

You can return the MFC to the original factory settings. Fonts and

macros in the temporary settings are cleared.

Press Menu, 4, 3.

Press 1 to restore the factory

settings

43.Reset Printer

▲

▼

1.Reset

2.Exit

Select ▲▼ & Set

—OR—

Press 2 to exit without making a change.

Press Stop/Exit.

Only the printer settings will be returned to the original factory

settings.

11 - 18 USING THE MFC AS A PRINTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer driver settings

(Windows^®Only)

Printer driver settings

You can change the following printer settings when you print from

your computer:

■ Media Type

■ Multiple Page

■ Duplex

■ Watermark*¹*²

■ Scaling*²

■ Print Date & Time*¹*²

■ Quick Print Setup*¹*²

■ Secure Print*¹

*¹These settings are not available with the BR-script driver.

*²These settings are not available with the Universal printer driver.

How to access the printer driver settings

Select Print from the File menu in your application software.

Select Brother MFC-8420 or MFC-8820D (USB) Printer as

your printer and click Preferences for Windows^®2000/XP

(Properties for Windows^®95/98/98SE and Me, Document

Default for Windows NT^®4.0). The Printing Preferences

dialog box will appear.

The way you access the printer driver settings depends on your

operating system and software applications.

The screens shown in this section are from Windows^®XP.

The screens on your Computer may vary depending on your

Windows Operating System.

Some descriptions in this chapter are based on the

MFC-8820D. These descriptions also apply to the MFC-8420

and MFC-8820DN.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Features in the Brother Native Driver

The Brother Native driver is a printer driver developed exclusively by

Brother, this driver includes more features than the Microsoft^®

Windows^®Universal printer driver.

Basic tab

Select the Paper Size, Multiple Page, Border Line (if any) and

Orientation.

Select number of Copies and Media Type.

Select Paper Source (First Page and Other Pages).

Auto Select allowsthe printer driver to select a suitable tray for

Paper Sizeautomatically. You can set the paper size for each

tray in the Accessories tab. (See Accessories tab on page

12 -15.)

To return to the default settings, click the Default button.

12 - 2 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper Size

From the drop-down box select the Paper Size you are using.

Multiple Page

The Multiple Page selection can reduce the image size of a page

allowing multiple pages to be printed on one sheet of paper or

enlarging the image size for printing one page on multiple sheets of

paper.

Ex. 4 in 1

Ex. 1 in 2 × 2 pages

Border Line

When printing multiple pages on one sheet with the Multiple Page

feature you can select to have a solid border, dash border or no

border around each page on the sheet.

Orientation

Orientation selects the position of how your document will be printed

(Portrait or Landscape).

Portrait

Landscape

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copies

The copies selection sets the number of copies that will be printed.

Collate

With the Collate check box selected, one complete copy of your

document will be printed and then repeated for the number of copies

you selected. If the Collate check box is not selected, then each

page will be printed for all the copies selected before the next page

of the document is printed.

Collate box checked

Collate box not checked

Media Type

You can use the following types of media in your MFC. For the best

print quality, select the type of media that you wish to use.

Plain Paper

Thin Paper

Thick Paper

Thicker Paper

Bond Paper

Transparencies

Envelopes

Env. Thick

Env. Thin

■ When using ordinary plain paper (19 to 25 lb), select Plain

Paper. When using heavier weight paper, envelopes or

rough paper selectThick Paper orThicker Paper. For bond

paper, select Bond Paper for OHP transparencies, select

Transparencies.

■

When you use envelopes, select Envelopes. If the toner is

not fixed to the envelope correctly when Envelopes has

been selected, selectEnv. Thick. If the envelope is crumpled

when Envelopes has been selected, select Env. Thin

12 - 4 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced tab

To return to the default settings, click the Default button.

Change the tab settings by selecting one of the following icons:

1 Print Quality

2 Duplex

3 Watermark

4 Page Setting

5 Device Options

Print Quality

Resolution

You can change the resolution as follows:

■ HQ 1200

■ 600 dpi

■ 300 dpi

When you select Use Duplex Unit, HQ1200 is not available.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Toner Save

You can save running costs by turning on the Toner Save Mode,

which reduces the print density.

Print Setting

For Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me

Print Setting is used for optimizing your print quality for the type of

original being printed (Photos, Graphics or Scanned Images). When

you choose Auto (Recommended), the printer automatically prints

with the most suitable print settings.

With the Print Setting set to Manual, you can change the Brightness,

Contrast and Graphics Quality options manually.

For Windows^®2000/XP/NT^®WS 4.0

■ Check Use Printer Halftone to print using Halftone.

■ Check Use System Halftone to print using Halftone of the

system. To change the setting, press Setting.

■ If the halftone cannot be printed correctly, check Improve gray

printing.

12 - 6 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplex Printing

Choosing the Duplex Printing icon displays the Duplex features

available.

Use Duplex Unit (For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

Check the Duplex box and then select Use Duplex Unit. In this

mode the MFC prints on both sides of the paper automatically.

Manual Duplex

Check the Duplex box and then select Manual Duplex. In thismode,

the MFC prints all the even numbered pages first. Then the printer

driver stops and shows the instructions required to re-install the

paper. When you click OK the odd numbered pages are printed.

Duplex Type

You can select Duplex Type. There are six types of duplex

directions available for each orientation.

Flip on Left Edge

Flip on Right Edge

Flip on Top Edge

Flip on Bottom Edge

Flip on Top Edge (No Reverse)

Flip on Bottom Edge (No Reverse)

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Binding Offset

Check the Binding Offset option, you can specify the offset value of

the binding side in inches or millimeters (0 - 8 inches) [0 - 203.2 mm].

Watermark

You can place a logo or text into your document as a Watermark.

You can select one of the preset Watermarks, or you can use a

bitmap file or text file that you have created.

Check Use Watermark, and then select the watermark you want to

use.

In background

Check In background to print the watermark image in the

background of your document. If this feature is not checked then the

Watermark will be printed on top of your document.

In Outline Text

(Window^®2000 Professional/XP/NT^®WS 4.0 Only)

Check In Outline Text if youonlywant to print an outline of the watermark.

12 - 8 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Watermark

The Print Watermark feature offers the following print choices:

■ On all pages

■ On first page only

■ From second page

■ Custom

■ Apply from second copy (collate only) (For Windows^®

2000/XP/Windows NT^®4.0)

Watermark Setting

You can change the Watermark’s size and position on the page by

selecting the Watermark, and clicking the Edit button. If you want to

add a new Watermark, click the Newbutton, and then select Text or

Bitmap in the Watermark Style.

■ Title

You can select the CONFIDENTIAL, COPY or DRAFT as the

standard title or enter a title you like in the field.

■ Watermark Text

Enter your Watermark text into the Text Box, and then select the

Font, Size, Darkness and Style.

■ Watermark Bitmap

Enter the file name and location of your bitmap image in the File

box, or Browse for the file location. You can also set the scaling

size of the image.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ Position

This setting offers you the control for where the Watermark is to

be positioned on the page.

Page Setting

You can change the print size of your document with the Scaling

feature.

■ Check Off if you want to print the document as it appears on your

screen.

■ Check Fit to Paper Size, if your document has an unusual size,

or if you have only the standard size paper.

■ Check the Free box if you want to manually reduce or enlarge the

output.

■ You can also use the Mirror Print or Reverse Print feature for

your page setting.

12 - 10 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Device Options

Lets you set the following Printer Functions:

Secure Print

Secure documents are documents that are password protected

when they are sent to the MFC. Only the people who know the

password will be able to print them. Since the documents are

secured at the MFC, you must use the controlpanelof the MFC (with

the password) to print them.

To send a secured document:

Select Secure Print from Printer Function and check Secure

Print.

Enter your password, user name and job name and click OK.

You must print the secured documents from the control panel of

the MFC. (See Secure key on page 11-16.)

To delete a secured document:

You need to use the control panel of the MFC to delete a

secured document. (See Secure key on page 11-16.)

You can store up to 8 MB of secured data in the MFC's memory.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quick Print Setup

The Quick Print Setup feature allows you to quickly select driver

settings. To view setting, simply click your mouse button on the task

tray

icon. This feature can be set to ON or OFF from the Device

Options section.

The factory setting is OFF.

12 - 12 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Administrator (For Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me Users Only)

The administrator selection permits the Copy, Scaling and

Watermark features to be locked and password protected.

Record your password and keep it in a safe place for future

reference. If you forget your password these settings can not be

accessed.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Date & Time

When enabled the Print Date and Time feature will automatically

print the date and time from your computers system clock on your

document.

Click the Setting button to change the Date and Time Format. You

can change the Font by clicking the Font button or the Position. To

include a background with the Date and Time select Opaque. When

Opaque is selected you can set the Darkness of the Date and Time

background by changing the percentage.

The Date and Time indicated in the selection box represents the

format that will be printed. The actual Date and Time printed on

your document is automatically retrieved from the settings of

your computer.

12 - 14 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessories tab

The Accessories Tab includes the settings for configuring the

printer driver for the size of paper loaded in each paper source. This

tab also installs any additional options into the driver settings.

Paper Source Setting

To configure the paper size for each paper source, highlight the source

in the Paper Source Setting list. Select thePaper Size from the

pull-down box and click Update. When Auto Select (default paper

source)isset in theBasic tab of the printerdriver (see Basic tab on page

12-2), the printer driver will automatically use thePaper Source Setting

to select a tray that matches thePaper Size setting in the printer driver.

Default Source

The Default Source allows you to choose the paper source that will be used when

the papersize of the document being sent does not match the Paper Source settings.

Available Options

In order to access the optional 2nd

paper tray the option must be

installed in the driver. Highlight the

model number from the Available

Options list and click Add. The

optional tray will then be listed in the

Installed box, Paper Source Setting

list and the screen illustration will

display the 2nd tray.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Support tab

The SupportTab provides driver version and setting information. In

addition there are links to the Brother Solutions Center and the

Driver Update Web sites.

Click the Support tab to display the following screen:

Brother Solutions Center

The Brother Solutions Center is a Web site offering information

about your Brother product including FAQs (Frequently Asked

Questions), User Guides, Driver Updates and Tips for using your

MFC.

Web Update

Web Update checks the Brother web site for updated drivers, and

automatically downloads and updates the printer driver on your

computer.

Check Setting

The Check Setting selection displays a list of your current driver

settings.

12 - 16 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Features in the PS printer driver

(For Windows^®)

The Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP and Windows

NT^®4.0 utilizes BR-Script 3(PostScript^®3^™language emulation)

driver.

You can download the latest driver by accessing the Brother

Solutions Center at http://solutions.brother.com

To install the PS driver

If you have already installed the printer driver following the instruction in the

Quick Setup Guide, insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive on your PC

and clickInstall Software. Choose MFL-Pro Suiteand follow the on-screen

instructions. When the Select Components screen appears, check PS

Printer Driver, and then continue following the on-screen instructions.

If you have not previously installed the driver and software, insert the

CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive on yourPC and clickInstall Software

ChooseMFL-Pro Suite and follow the on-screen instructions. When the

Setup Typescreen appears, select Custom and check the PS Printer

Driver. Then continue following on-screen instructions.

The screens in this section are from Windows^®XP.

Thescreenson yourPCwillvarydepending on yourOperating System.

Ports tab

Select the port where your printer is connected or the path to the

network printer you are using.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Device Settings tab

Select the options you installed.

12 - 18 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Layout tab

If you are using Windows NT^®4.0, Windows^®2000 or XP, you

can access the Layout tab by clicking Printing Preferences...

in the General tab of the Brother MFC-8820D BR-Script3

Properties screen.

You can change the Layout setting by selecting the setting in the

Orientation, Page Order and Page Per Sheet.

Booklet (For MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN)

(For Windows^®2000/XP)

You can print a booklet by selecting Booklet from Pages Per Sheet

list.

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper / Quality tab

If you are using Windows NT^®4.0, Windows^®2000 or XP, you

can access the Paper/Quality tab by clicking Printing

Preferences... in the General tab of the Brother MFC-8820D

BR-Script3 Properties screen.

Select the Paper Source.

12 - 20 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Options

If you are using Windows NT^®4.0, Windows^®2000 or XP, you

can access the Brother MFC-8820D BR-Script3 Advanced

Optionstab by clicking Advanced... button in the Layout tab or

the Paper/Quality tab.

Select the Paper Size and Copy Count.

Set the Print Quality, Scaling and TrueType Font setting.

You can change settings by selecting the setting in the Printer

Features list:

■ Media Type

■ Toner Save

■ BR-Script Level

PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 12 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to scan using

Windows^®

The scanning operations and drivers will be different depending

on your operating system.

For Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and

Windows NT^®Workstation 4.0

The MFC uses a TWAIN Compliant driver for scanning

documents from your applications. (See Scanning a document,

TWAIN compliant on page 13 -1.)

For Windows^®XP

The MFC uses Windows^®Imaging Acquisition (WIA) for

scanning documents. (See S c anning a document (For

Windows^®XP only) on page 13-10.)

For ScanSoft^®, PaperPort^®and TextBridge^®OCR

Go to Using ScanSof t^®PaperPort^®and TextBridge^®OCR on

page 13-1 9.

Scanning a document

TWAIN compliant

The Brother MFL-Pro Suite software includes a TWAIN compliant

scanner driver. TWAIN drivers meet the standard universal protocol

for communicating between scanners and software applications.

This means that not only can you scan images directly into the

PaperPort^®viewer that Brother included with your MFC, but you can

also scan images directly into hundreds of other software

applications that support TWAIN scanning. These applications

include popular programs like Adobe^®Photoshop^®, Adobe^®

PageMaker^®, CorelDraw^®and many more.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to access the Scanner

Open the software application (ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®) to scan

a document.

The instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®8.0SE.

Select Scan from the File drop-down menu or select the Scan

button. The Scan pane appears in the left panel.

Select Brother MFC-8820D, Brother MFC-8820D USBorBrother

MFC-8820D LAN from the Scanner drop-down list box.

Click Scan.

If the MFC is connected via:

Parallel - use 'Brother MFC-8520D'

USB - use 'Brother MFC-8820 USB'

LAN - use 'Brother MFC-8820D LAN'

TheBrother MFC-8820D, Brother MFC-8820D USB or Brother

MFC-8820D LAN Scanner Setupdialog box will appear:

13 - 2 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning a document into the PC

You can scan a whole page

—OR—

Scan a portion of the page after pre-scanning the document.

Scanning a whole page

Place the original face up in the ADF (automatic document

feeder), or face down on the scanner glass.

Adjust the following settings, if required, in the Scanner window:

■ Image Type

■ Resolution

■ Scan Type

■ Brightness

■ Contrast

■ Document Size

After you select a document size, you can adjust the scanning

area further by clicking the left mouse button and dragging it.

This is required when you want to crop an image when

scanning.

S e e Settings in the Scanner window on page 13-6.

Click the Start button in the scanner window.

When scanning is completed, click Cancel to return to the

PaperPort^®window.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan

The Pre-Scan button is used to preview an image for cropping any

unwanted areas from the image. When you are satisfied with the

preview, click the Startbutton in the scanner window to scan the image.

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Scanning area

Select the settings for Image Type, Resolution, Scan Type,

Brightness and Contrast, as needed.

In the Brother MFC-8820D, Brother MFC-8820D USBor Brother

MFC-8820D LAN Scanner Setupdialog box, click the PreScan

button.

The entire original will be scanned into the PC and will appear in

the Scanning Area.

Scanning area

Select the portion you want to scan by clicking the left mouse

button and dragging it.

13 - 4 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can enlarge the portion you selected by pressing

check it. If you want to select the different portion, use

undo the image.

Place the original face up in the ADF again, if you used the ADF

in Step 1.

Click Start.

This time only the selected area of the original will appear in the

PaperPort^®window (or your software application window).

In the PaperPort^®window, use the options available to refine the

image.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Settings in the Scanner window

Image Type

Select the image type of output from Photo, Web or Text.

Resolution and Scan Type will be altered for each default setting.

The default settings are:

Image Type

Resolution

Scan Type

24-bit color

Photo

Web

Select for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi

Select for attaching the scanned

image to web pages.

100 x 100 dpi

200 x 200 dpi

Text

Select for scanning text

documents.

Black & White

Resolution

You can change the scanning resolution from the Resolution drop

down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time,

but can achieve a finer scanned image. The following table shows

the resolution you can choose and the available colors.

Resolution

Black & White /

Gray

(Error Diffusion)

256 color

True Gray /

24 bit color /

24 bit color (Fast)

100 × 100 dpi

150 × 150 dpi

200 × 200 dpi

300 × 300 dpi

400 × 400 dpi

600 × 600 dpi

1200 × 1200 dpi

2400 × 2400 dpi

4800 × 4800 dpi

9600 × 9600 dpi

Yes

13 - 6 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan Type

Black &White: Set the Scan Type to Black & White for text or line art.

Gray Scale:

Set the Scan Type to Gray or True Gray for

photographic images.

Colors:

Set either:

256 Color, which scans up to 256 colors, or 24-bit

color which scans up to 16.8 million colors.

Although using 24-bit color createsan image with

the most accurate colors, the image file will be

approximately three times larger than a file

created with 256 Color.

Brightness

Adjust this settings (-50 to 50) to obtain the best image. The default

value is 0, representing an ‘average’.

You can set the level by dragging the slide bar to the right or left to

lighten or darken the image. You can also type a value in the box for

the setting.

If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness value and

scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher

brightness value and scan the document again.

Contrast

This setting is adjustable only when you have selected one of the

gray scale settings. It is not available when Black & Whiteand Color

settings are selected as the Scan Type.

You can increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slide

bar to the left or right. An increase emphasizes dark and light areas

of the Image, while a decrease revealsmore detail in gray areas. You

can also type a value in the box for the setting.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Document Size

Set the Size to one of the following:

■ Letter (8 1/2 × 11 in.)

■ A4 (210 × 297 mm)

■ Legal (8 1/2 × 14 in.)

■ A5 (148 × 210 mm)

■ B5 (182 × 257 mm)

■ Executive (7 1/4 × 10 1/2 in.)

■ Business Card (90 × 60 mm)

■ Photo 3.5 × 5 in. (9 × 13cm)

■ Photo 5 × 7 in. (13 × 18cm)

■ APS C 4 × 6 in. (10 × 15cm)

■ Custom (User adjustable from 0.35 × 0.35 in. to 8.5 × 14 in. or 8.9

× 8.9 mm to 215.9 × 355.6 mm)

To scan photographs or business cards, select the document size,

and then place the document face down at the center of scanner glass.

When scanning photographsorother imagesfor useina word processor

or other graphics application. You should try different settings for the

contrast and resolution modes to see which best suits your needs.

If you selected Custom as the size, The Custom Document Size

dialog box will appear.

Type the Name, Width and Height for the document.

You can choose “mm” or “inch” as the unit for Width and Height.

13 - 8 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can see the actual paper size you selected on the screen.

■ Width: shows the width of scanning area

■ Height: shows the height of scanning area

■ Data Size: shows the approximate data size calculated in a

Bitmap format. The size willbe different for other file formats such

as JPEG.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning a document

(For Windows^®XP only)

WIA compliant

Windows^®XP uses Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) for scanning

images from the MFC. You can scan images directly into the

PaperPort^®viewer that Brother included with your MFC or you can

scan images directly into any other software application that

supports WIA or TWAIN scanning.

How to access the scanner

Open your software application to scan a document.

The instructions for scanning in this Guide are for when you use

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®8.0. The steps for scanning from another

application may vary.

Select Scan from the File drop-down menu or select the Scan

button.

The Scan pane appears in the left panel.

Select the scanner you are using from the Scanner drop-down

list box.

Click Scan.

The Scan dialog box will appear:

13 - 10 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning a document into the PC

If you want to scan a whole page, use the ADF (automatic document

feeder).

—OR—

If you want to scan a portion of the page after pre-scanning the

document, use the scanner glass (Flatbed).

Scanning a document using the ADF

Place the original face up in the ADF (automatic document feeder).

Select the Document Feeder from the Paper source

drop-down list box (A).

Select the picture type (B).

Select the Paper size from the drop-down list box (D).

If you require advanced settings, clickAdjust the quality ofthe

scanned picture (C). You can select Brightness, Contrast,

Resolution and Picture Type from the Advanced Properties.

Click the OK button after you choose your settings.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ The scanner resolution you can select is up to 1200 × 1200

dpi.

■ For resolutions greater than 1200 dpi, use the Brother

Scanner Utility. (See Brother Scanner Utility on page 13-15.)

To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the

Scan dialog box.

13 - 12 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PreScanning to crop a portion you want to scan using the

scanner glass

The Preview button is used to preview an image for cropping any

unwanted portions from the image. When you are satisfied with the

preview, click the Scan button from the scanner window to scan the

image.

Place the original face down on the scanner glass.

Make sure you selected Flatbed in the Paper source pull-down

box (A).

Scanning area

Select the picture type (B).

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In the Scan dialog box, click the Preview button. The entire

original will be scanned into the PC and will appear in the

scanning area.

Select the portion you want to scan by clicking the left mouse

button and dragging it over the area.

Scanning area

If you require advanced settings, click Picture Type from the

Adjust the quality of the scanned picture(C). You can select

Brightness, Contrast, Resolution and AdvancedProperties.

Click the OK button after you choose your settings.

13 - 14 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To start scanning your document, click the Scan button in the

Scan dialog box.

This time only the selected area of the original will appear in the

PaperPort^®window (or your software application window).

Brother Scanner Utility

The Brother Scanner Utility is used for configuring the scanner driver

for resolutions greater than 1200dpiand for changing the paper size.

If you want to set Legal size as the default size, change the setting

using this utility. You must restart your PC for the new settings to take

effect.

To run the utility:

You can run the utility by selecting the Scanner Utility located in the

Start/All Programs/Brother/Brother MFL-Pro Suitemenu.

Scanning at resolutions greater than 1200dpi may cause

problems with some scanning applications.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the scan key (For USB or

Parallel interface cable users)

You can use

into your word processing, graphics or E-mail applications or your

computer folder. The advantage of using (Scan) is that you

(Scan) on the control panel to scan originals

avoid the mouse clicks required to scan from your computer.

For Scan to E-mail, Scan to Image, Scan to OCR and Scan

to File

Before you can use

(Scan) on the control panel, you

must have connected the MFC to your Windows^®based

computer and loaded the appropriate Brother Drivers for your

version of Windows^®.

When you are ready to use

(Scan), make sure the

Brother Control Center application is running on your computer.

For details about how to configure the Brother Control Center

buttons to launch the application of your choice using

(Scan), go to the appropriate chapter:

■ For Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and

WindowsNT^®WS 4.0, see Using the Brother Contro l C en t e r

f o r Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and

W i nd o ws N T^®WS 4.0 on page 14-1.

■ For Windows^®XP, see Using the Windows^®-Based Brother

SmartUI Control Center on page 15-1.

■ If your MFC is connected with both a USB and a Parallel

cable, you need to select USB or Parallel as the destination

in each step.

13 - 16 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to E-mail

You can either scan a black and white or color original into your

E-mail application as a file attachment. You can change the

(Scan) configuration. (See Sc a n to E -m a i l on page 14-10 to 14-11.)

(For Windows^®XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to

button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Press

to E-Mail.

Press Set.

(Scan).

to select Scan

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

The MFC will scan the original, create a file attachment, and

launch your E-mail application, displaying the new message

waiting to be addressed.

Scan to Image

You can scan a color picture into your graphics application for

viewing and editing. You can change the

(Scan)

configuration. (S e e Scan to Image on page 14-14.) (For Windows^®

XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button

configuration on page 15-5 to 15 -11 .)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Press

(Scan).

or to select Scan

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

to Image.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to OCR

If your original is text, you can have it converted by ScanSoft^®

TextBridge^®to an editable text file and then have the result displayed

in your word processing application for viewing and editing. You can

change the

(Scan) configuration. (See Scan to OCR (Word

Processor) on page 14-12 to 14-13.) (For Windows^®XP: S e e

Har d ware Section: Changing the Scan to button configuration on

page 15-5 to 15-1 1.)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Press

(Scan).

or to select Scan

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

to OCR.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

Scan to File

You can scan a black and white or a color original into your computer

and save it as a file in the folder you choose. The file type and

specific folder are based on the settings you have chosen in the Scan

to File screen of the Brother MFL-Pro Control Center. (See Scan to

F i l e on page 14-8 to 14-9.) (For Windows^®XP: See Hardware

Section: Changing the Scan to button configuration on page 15-5 to

15-11.)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Press

(Scan).

or to select Scan

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press

to File.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

13 - 18 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®and

TextBridge^®OCR

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®for Brother is a document management

application. You will use PaperPort^®to view scanned documents.

PaperPort^®has a sophisticated, yet easy-to-use, filing system that

will help you organize your graphics and text documents. It allows

you to combine or “stack” documents of different formats for printing,

faxing or filing.

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®can be accessed through the ScanSoft^®

PaperPort^®program group.

See Documentation for ScanSoft^®PaperPort ^®on the CD-ROM.

The complete ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®Users Guide, including

ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®OCR, is in the documentation on the

CD-ROM.

This chapter is only an introduction to the basic operations.

When you install MFL-Pro Suite, ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®for Brother

and ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®OCR are installed with it automatically.

If you are using Windows^®XP, Windows NT^®4.0 or Windows^®

2000 Professional, we recommend that you are logged on with

administrator rights.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing items

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®provides several ways to view items:

Desktop View displays a thumbnail (a small graphic that represents

each item in a Desktop or folder).

Items in the selected folder appear on the PaperPort^®Desktop. You

can see PaperPort^®items (MAX files) and non-PaperPort^®items

(files created using other applications).

Non-PaperPort^®items include an icon that indicates the application

that was used to create the item; a non-PaperPort^®item isrepresented

by a small rectangular thumbnail and not an actual image.

Desktop View displays items

as thumbnails

Page View displays a close-up of a single page and you can open a

PaperPort^®item by double-clicking on it.

As long as you have the appropriate application on your computer to

display it, you can also double-clicka non-PaperPort^®item to open it.

Page View displays each item

as a full page

13 - 20 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Organizing your items in folders

PaperPort^®has an easy-to-use filing system for organizing your

items. The filing system consists of folders and items that you select

to view in Desktop View. An item can be a PaperPort^®item or a

non-PaperPort^®item:

■ Folders are arranged in a “tree” structure in the Folder View.

You use this section to select folders and view their items in

Desktop View.

■ You can simply drag and drop an item onto a folder.

When the folder is highlighted, release the mouse button and the

item is stored in that folder.

■ Folders can be “nested”—that is, stored in other folders.

■ When you double-click a folder, its items (both PaperPort^®MAX

files and non paperport^®files) appear on the Desktop.

■ You can also use Windows^®Explorer to manage the folders

and items shown in Desktop View.

Quick links to other applications

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®automatically recognizes many other

applications on your computer and creates a “working link” to them.

The Send To Bar at the bottom of the Desktop view shows icons of

those linked applications.

To use a link, drag an item onto one of the icons to start the

application represented bythe icon. Atypical use of the Send To Bar

is to select an item and then fax it.

This sample Send To Bar shows several applicationswith links to

PaperPort^®.

If PaperPort^®does not automatically recognize one of the

applications on your computer, you can manually create a link using

the Add to Send To Bar... command.

(See PaperPort^®in the Documentation section on the CD-ROM for

more information about creating new links.)

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®OCR lets you convert

image text into text you can edit

Software by:

ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®OCR is installed automatically with

PaperPort^®when you install MFL-Pro Suite on your computer.

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®can quickly convert the text on a ScanSoft^®

PaperPort^®item (which isreally just a picture of the text) into text that

you can edit with a word processing application.

PaperPort^®uses the optical character recognition application

ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®, which comes with PaperPort^®

—OR—

PaperPort^®can use your preferred OCR application if it is already on

your computer. You can convert the entire item, or by using the Copy

Text command, you can select only a portion of the text to convert.

Dragging an item onto a word-processing link icon starts

PaperPort^®’s built-in OCR application, or you can use your own

OCR application.

You can Import items from other applications

In addition to scanning items, you can bring items into PaperPort^®in

a variety of ways and convert them to PaperPort^®(MAX) files in

several different ways:

■ Print to the Desktop View from another application, such as

Microsoft^®Excel.

■ Import files saved in other file formats, such as Windows^®Bitmap

(BMP) or Tag Image File Format (TIFF).

13 - 22 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can Export items in other formats

You can export or save PaperPort^®items in several popular file

formats, such as BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or self-viewing.

For example, to create a file for an Internet Web site, export it as a

JPEG file. Web pages often use JPEG files for displaying images.

Exporting an image file

Select the Save As command from the File pull-down menu in

the PaperPort^®window. The Save ‘XXXXX’ as dialog boxwill be

displayed.

Select the drive and directory where you want to store the file.

Enter the new file name and choose the file type or select a

name from the File Name text box. (You can scroll through the

Directories and File Name listing for prompting.)

Select the OK button to save your file, or Cancel to return to the

PaperPort^®without saving it.

HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS ^®13 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to Uninstall PaperPort^®and ScanSoft^®

TextBridge^®

For Windows^®95/98/98SE, and Windows NT^®Workstation 4.0 and

Windows^®Me:

Select Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs

and the Install/Uninstall tab.

Select Brother Extensions for Paperport and click the

Add/Remove button.

Select PaperPort^®8.0 SEfrom the list and clickthe Add/Remove button.

For Windows^®2000 Professional:

Select Start, Settings, Control Panel and Add/Remove Programs.

Select Brother Extensions for Paperport and click the

Change/Remove button.

Select PaperPort^®8.0 SE from the list and click the Change button.

For Windows^®XP:

Select Start, Control Panal, Add or Remove Programs and the

Change or Remove Programs icon.

Select PaperPort^®8.0 SE from the list and click the Change button.

13 - 24 HOW TO SCAN USING WINDOWS^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using theBrother ControlCenter

for Windows^®

95/98/98SE/Me/2000Professional

and Windows NT^®WS 4.0

If you are using Windows^®2000 Professional or Windows NT^®

4.0, we recommend that you are logged on with administrator

rights.

Brother MFL-Pro Control Center

The Brother Control Center is a software utility that pops up on the

PC screen whenever paper is put in the ADF of the MFC. This allows

you to quickly and with very few mouse clicks, to access the most

frequently used scanning applications. Using the Control Center

stops the need to manually startup any specific applications.

The Brother Control Center provides three operations (Scan, Copy

and PC-Fax):

■ Scan directly to a file, E-mail, word processor or graphic

application of your choice

■ Copy

■ PC Faxing using the Brother PC-FAX software

US IN G THE BR OTHE R C ONTR OL CE NTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS 4 .0 14 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AutoLoad the Brother Control Center

The Control Center is loaded every time Windows^®is started.

When the Control Center is loaded, the Control Center

will appear on the task bar.

icon

If you don’t want the Control Center to load automatically, you can

turn off AutoLoad.

If the Control Center

icon does not appear on your task

bar, you will have to launch the software.

Double-click the Control Center

icon on the desktop or

from the Start menu, select Programs, ScanSoft PaperPort

8.0, and then click Brother SmartUI POPUP.

How to turn off AutoLoad

Left-click the Control Center

icon and click Show.

When the Control Center window appears, left click the Smart

Click Control Center button.

A dialog box will appear:

Uncheck the ‘AutoLoad’ Pop-Up check box.

14 - 2 USINGTHEBROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ ME/ 2000 PROFESSI ONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother Control Center features

Auto Configuration

During installation the Control Center will check your system to set

up the default applications for E-mail, word processing and the

graphics viewer/editor.

For example, if you are using Outlook as your default E-mail

application, the Control Center will create a link and a scanning

application button for Outlook.

You can change a default application. Right-click the appropriate

Control Center button to display Configurations and then click it.

Select a different application.

For example, you can change a scan button from MS Word Pad

to MSWord

by changing the application

that is listed for the Word Processor.

US IN G THE BR OTHE R C ONTR OL CE NTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS 4 .0 14 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan key operations

Scan to File—Lets you scan directly to a file on your computer. You

can change the file type and directory for the document you are

scanning.

Scan to E-mail—Lets you scan a picture or text document directly

into an E-mail application as a standard attachment. You can choose

the file type and resolution for the attachment.

Scan to OCR (Word Processor)—Lets you scan a text document, run

ScanSoft TextBridge OCR, and insert the text original (not a graphic

image) into a word processing file. You can choose the word

processing application, such as Word Pad, MS Word, and so on.

Scan to Image—Lets you scan an image directly into any graphic

viewer/editor application. You can choose the graphics application,

such as Microsoft Paint.

Copy operations

Copy—Lets you use the PC and any Windows^®printer driver for

enhanced copy operations.

You can scan the page on the Brother MFC and print the copies

using any of the features of the Brother MFC printer driver.

—OR—

You can send the copy output to any standard Windows^®printer

driver that is on your PC.

PC-Fax operation

Send a Fax—Lets you scan a picture or text original and send the

image as a fax from the PC using the Brother PC-FAX software.

14 - 4 USINGTHEBROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ ME/ 2000 PROFESSI ONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanner settings for Scan, Copy and PC-Fax buttons

When the Pop-Up screen appears, you can access the Scanner

Settings window.

Clickthe Smart Click

Center screen

—OR—

icon at the top right of the Brother Control

Click the Modify Settingsbutton on any of the Configuration screens.

Global settings

AutoLoad Pop-Up—Select this checkbox if you want Brother MFL

Control Center to load when you turn on your computer.

US IN G THE BR OTHE R C ONTR OL CE NTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS 4 .0 14 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up the scanner configurations

The Pop-Up application stores eight different scanning modes. Each

time you scan an original, you can choose the most appropriate

scanning mode from the following:

Faxing, Filing and Copying

Text for OCR

Photos

Photos (High Quality)

Photos (Quick Scan)

Custom

Draft Copy

Fine Copy

Each mode has its own set of stored settings. You can keep the

factory default settings or change them at any time:

Resolution—From the pull-down list, select the scanning

resolution you most often use.

Color Mode—From the pull-down list, select the color settings

you most often use.

Scan Size—From the pull-down list, select the scan size you

most often use.

Brightness—Slide the adjuster from 0% to 100%

Contrast—Slide the adjuster from 0% to 100%

Click OK to save your changes. If you make a mistake or want the

original default setting, just click the Restore Defaults button when

the scanning mode is displayed.

14 - 6 USINGTHEBROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ ME/ 2000 PROFESSI ONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Perform an operation from the Control Center

screen

If you see this screen it means you left-clicked a button in the Control

Center window without first placing an original in the ADF.

Place the original in the MFC’s ADF, and then click OK to go to the

Control Center screen.

If you want to scan the original from the scanner glass, please

use

(Scan) on the control panel of the MFC.

US IN G THE BR OTHE R C ONTR OL CE NTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS 4 .0 14 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to File

To access Scan to File Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click Scan to File and click on Configuration. Click the

Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the

Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore

Defaults button.

Scanner settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate

for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;

Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;

Draft Copy or Fine Copy.

To change any of the settings for the mode, click Modify Settings.

14 - 8 USINGTHEBROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ ME/ 2000 PROFESSI ONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Destination folder

PaperPort Folder—Select this checkboxto scan the original into your

PaperPort folder.

Other Folder—Select this checkbox, to scan the original as another

file type or to store it in another directory/folder.

File—If you selected Other folder from the pull-down list, select the

type of file:

PaperPort Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort Self-Viewing (*.exe)

PaperPort Browser-Viewable (*.htm)

PaperPort 5.0 Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort 4.0 Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort 3.0 Image Item (*.max)

Windows Bitmap (*bmp)

PC Paintbrush (*.pcx)

PCX Multi-page (*.dcx)

JPEG (*.jpg)

TIFF-Uncompressed (*.tif)

TIFF-Group 4 (*.tif)

TIFF-Class F (*.tif)

TIFF Multi-page - Uncompressed (*.tif)

TIFF Multi-page - Group 4 (*.tif)

TIFF Multi-page - Class F (*.tif)

Portable Network Graphics (*.png)

FlashPix (*.fpx)

To Search your system for the directory and folder you want, click the

Browse button. Click OK to save your settings.

US IN G THE BR OTHE R C ONTR OL CE NTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWS NT^®WS 4 .0 14 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to E-mail

To access Scan to E-mail Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click the E-mail application button and click on

Configuration. Click the Modify Settingsbutton to view the

configuration screen of the Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore

Defaults button.

Scanner settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate

for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;

Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;

Draft Copy or Fine Copy.

To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.

14 - 10 U SIN G THE BR OTHE R CONT ROL C ENTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/ 98S E/ME /2000 P ROFES SIONAL AND WI NDOWS NT^®WS 4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E-mail application

E-mail Application—From the pull-down list, select your E-mail

application.

E-mail Settings—Click the E-Mail Settings button to set up links.

The Send To Options window will appear:

Send to Options

Convert attachments to specified file type—Converts items to the

type in the File Type box. Clear this check box to keep files in their

source format; for example, to keep Word documents in the .doc

format and JPEG images in the .jpg format.

All documents and image items—Converts all items regardless of

the program in which the item was created; for example, converts all

Word (doc) files and JPEG (.jpg) files to the file type.

PaperPort image items (max) only—Converts only PaperPort

image items (.max) files. PaperPort does not convert other file types,

such as JPEG images and Word documents.

File type—Identifies the format in which to convert items; for

example, JPEG or TIFF.

Combine items into single file, if possible—Combinesallselected

items into a single file that contains multiple pages. This option is

available only when the file type supports multiple pages, such as

multi-page TIFF.

USINGTHE BROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWSNT^®WS4.0 14 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to OCR (Word Processor)

To access Scan to OCR Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click the word processor application button and click on

Configuration. Click the Modify Settingsbutton to view the

configuration screen of the Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults

button.

Scanner settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate

for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;

Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;

Draft Copy or Fine Copy.

To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.

14 - 12 U SIN G THE BR OTHE R CONT ROL C ENTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/ 98S E/ME /2000 P ROFES SIONAL AND WI NDOWS NT^®WS 4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Word Processor

Word Processor—From the pull-down list, select the word processor

you want to use.

Click the Link Settings button to display the screen to set up the

document format you want to use and identify the OCR program:

File Type—From the pull-down list, select the file type you want to

use for your word processor or text documents.

OCR—Identify the OCR program to use to convert scanned

document images to editable documents. This option is available

only when you have an OCR program other than the one provided

with PaperPort. (PaperPort 8.0 uses the same OCR engine that is in

ScanSoft's TextBridge Pro Millennium product.)

Click the Settings button to choose how the OCR application will

read the pages that you scan into your word processor application.

The OCR Settings window will appear:

Select your setting and click OK.

■ Auto orient page—Click this checkbox to automatically rotate

pages so that the text is upright.

■ Single column output—Click this checkbox if you want to

remove columns from multi-column documentsso that converted

text appears in a one-column format.

USINGTHE BROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWSNT^®WS4.0 14 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to Image

To access Scan to Image Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click the graphic application button and click on

Configuration. Click the Modify Settingsbutton to view the

configuration screen of the Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults

button.

Scanner Settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate

for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;

Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;

Draft Copy or Fine Copy.

To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.

Target Application

Application—From the pull-down list, select the application you want

to add to this Pop-Up screen.

Click the Custom Link Settings button to set up links for your

user-defined application.

14 - 14 U SIN G THE BR OTHE R CONT ROL C ENTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/ 98S E/ME /2000 P ROFES SIONAL AND WI NDOWS NT^®WS 4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy

To access the Copy Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click the Copy and click on Configuration. Click the

Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the

Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults

button.

Scanner settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that isappropriate for

the type of file: Draft Copy orFine Copy

To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.

Number of copies

Copies—Enter the number of copies you want to print.

To change the copy options, click the Copy Options button.

Click OK to save your Copy settings.

USINGTHE BROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWSNT^®WS4.0 14 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Send a fax

To access the Send a fax Configurations screen

Place the original face up in the ADF. The Brother Control

Center screen will pop up.

Right-click the Send a fax and click on Configuration. Click the

Modify Settings button to view the configuration screen of the

Control Center.

To save your settings, click OK

—OR—

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore Defaults

button.

Scanner settings

From the pull-down list, select the scanning mode that is appropriate

for the type of file: Faxing, Filing and Copying; Text for OCR;

Photos; Photos (High Quality); Photos (Quick Scan); Custom;

Draft Copy or Fine Copy.

To change any of the settings for this mode, click Modify Settings.

14 - 16 U SIN G THE BR OTHE R CONT ROL C ENTE R FOR WIN DOWS ^®95/98/ 98S E/ME /2000 P ROFES SIONAL AND WI NDOWS NT^®WS 4.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PC-FAX Settings

Brother PC-Fax

FAX Resolution—Fine (200 × 200)

To change the fax options, click the FAX Options button.

The Brother PC-FAX Properties screen appears:

For Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me and Windows NT^®WS 4.0

For Windows^®2000 Professional

Select the Paper Size and Orientation (Portrait or Landscape)

and click OK.

To go back to the factory default settings, click the Restore

Defaults or Default button.

USINGTHE BROTHER CONTROLCENTER FOR WINDOWS^®95/98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND WINDOWSNT^®WS4.0 14 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Windows^®-Based

Brother SmartUI Control Center

(For Windows^®XP)

Brother SmartUI Control Center

The Brother Control Center is a software utility that allows you to

quite easily, with very few mouse clicks, access the most frequently

used scanning applications. Using the Control Center eliminates the

need to manually launch the specific applications and allows you to

scan a document directly to a folder on your computer. The Brother

Control Center provides four categories of operations:

Scan directly to a file, E-mail, word processor or graphics

application of your choice.

Enhanced copy functions, such as Four/Two or One-on-One

Copying.

PC Faxing using the Brother PC-Fax software.

Custom buttons allow you to configure a button to meet your

own application requirements.

In the Task Tray right-click on the Control Center

icon and select

Showto have access to the Brother SmartUI Control Center window.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AutoLoad the Brother Control Center

The Control Center is initially configured to automatically load each

time Windows^®is started. When the Control Center is loaded the

Control Center

icon will appear in the task bar. If you don’t want

the Control Center to load automatically, you can turn AutoLoad off.

How to turn off Auto Load

Right-click the Control Center

select Show.

icon in the Task Tray and

The main SmartUI ControlCenter window appears. Please look

at the bottom of the window for a check box labeled “AutoLoad

Pop-up”.

Uncheck the AutoLoad Pop-Up option to prevent the SmartUI

from automatically loading every time Windows is started.

15 - 2 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother Control Center features

The SmartUI control center gives you the ability to configure the

hardware Scan key on your MFC such as “Scan to File”. The “Scan

to File” feature allows you to scan a document directly to your hard

disk and choose the file format and destination folder without having

to run any other applications. Select which section you want by

clicking on the appropriate tab.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Configuration

During the installation process the Control Center checks your

system to determine the default applications for E-mail, word

processing and graphics viewer/editor.

For example, if you are using Outlook as your default E-mail

application, the Control Center automatically will create a link and a

scanning application button for Outlook.

You can change the default application by right-clicking on any of the

scan buttons in the Control Center and then clicking Configuration.

Select the Configuration tab and from the Application pull down

menu select a different application. For example, you can change the

E-mail scan button from Outlook Express to Outlook by changing the

application that is listed.

15 - 4 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hardware Section: Changing the Scan

to button configuration

When the SmartUI Control Center is displayed, you can access the

Hardware Section window to reconfigure the

(Scan) button

on your MFC. Click the Hardware Section tab at the top left of the

SmartUI Control Center screen. (See Usi n g the scan key (For USB

or Pa r allel in t e rface cable users) on page 13-16.)

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to E-mail

To configure the Scan to E-mail feature left-click on the Scan to

E-mail button and the following screen will appear. You have the

ability to change the configuration that includes the destination

E-mail application, attachment file and the scanner settings.

To change the destination E-mail application you use the Application

pull down list to select the compatible E-mail application, which is

installed on your system.

If you wish to change the attachment file type click on the Link

Preferences button to display a list of file types.

15 - 6 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to File

To configure the Scan to File feature, left click on the Scan to File

button and the following screen will appear.

Select the file type for the saved image by selecting from the Format

pull down list. You can save the file to the default PaperPort folder so

the file appears in PaperPort or you can select another

folder/directory by clicking the Browse button.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to Image

To configure the Scan to Image feature left-click on the Scan to

Image button and the following screen will appear. You have the

ability to change the configuration, which includes the destination

image format or document application.

15 - 8 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the default setting of the scan, click on the Scan Settings

tab.

You can set the Color Mode to Black & White, 8-bit Gray or 24-bit

Color.

The resolution can be changed from 100 to 1200 dpi. You can define

the size of the paper you’re using, and you can adjust the brightness

and contrast of the image before scanning.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to OCR

To configure the Scan to OCR feature left-click on the Scan to OCR

button and the following screen will appear. You have the ability to

change the configuration, which includes the destination

applications.

15 - 10 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You have the option to send your scan as a different file type. You

can select the application from the File Type window according to

your needs.

You have the option to choose your OCR setting from Single

column output to Auto orient page.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Software Section

The Software Section contains four groups of scan to buttons. Each

section has a number of different buttons which are predefined for

the most frequently used applications. The Scan section contains

four buttons for Scan to File, Scan to E-mail, Scan to Word Processor

and Scan to Image applications. The Copy section contains four

buttons for N to 1 copying. The Fax section button is for sending

faxesusing the Brother PC-FAXapplication and the Custom section

contains three buttons with which you can assign your own function.

15 - 12 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan

*1 Scan to File —enables you to scan directly to a disk file. You can

change the file type and destination directory, as needed.

*2 Scan to E-mail (Default: Outlook Express) —enables you to scan

a page or document directly into an E-mail application as a standard

attachment. You have the option of selecting the file type and

resolution for the attachment.

*3 Scan to Word Processor (Default: MSWordPad)—enables you to

scan a page or document, automatically run ScanSoft TextBridge

OCR and insert the text (not graphic image) into a word processing

program. You have the option of selecting the destination word

processing program, such as WordPad, MS Word, Word Perfect or

whichever word processing program is installed on your computer.

*4 Scan to Graphic Application (Default: MS Paint) —enables you to

scan a page directly into any graphic viewer/editor application. You

can select the destination application, such as MS Paint, Corel

PhotoPaint, Adobe PhotoShop, or any kind of image editor

application you already have installed on your computer.

Copy

Copy (Copy one to one)—allows you to use the PC and any

Windows^®printer driver forenhanced copyoperations. You can scan

the page on the MFC and print the copies using any of the features

of the MFC printer driver—OR—you can direct the copy output to any

standard Windows^®printer driver installed on the PC including

network printers.

Four/Two to One Copy—enables you to use the Four/Two on

One-page features of the Brother printer driver to copy four/two

original pages onto a single output page.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax

Send a Fax (Brother PC-FAX)—enables you to scan a page or

document and automatically send the image as a fax from the PC

using the Brother PC-FAX software.

Custom

Scan to File—These buttons have been pre-programmed for the

Scan to File feature. You can change the configuration of each of

these buttons to meet your specific requirements by right-clicking on

a button and following the configuration menus.

15 - 14 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to File

The Scan to File button allows you to scan an image and save it in a

specific file type to any directory on your hard disk. This allows you

to easily archive your paper documents. To configure the file type

and save to directory right-click on the Scan to File button and click

Configuration.

The Scan Action tab is set to File and should not be changed.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the configuration click on the Configuration tab.

Select the file type for the saved image by selecting from the Format

pull down list. You can save the file to the default PaperPort folder so

the file appears in PaperPort, or you can select another

folder/directory by clicking the Browse button.

You can change the default setting by selecting the Other Folder

button and then clicking Browse and selecting the folderin which you

wish to save your files.

15 - 16 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to E-mail

The Scan to E-mailis automatically configured to your default E-mail

application. To change the default E-mail application or attachment

file type, right-click on the E-mail button and select “Configuration”.

The Scan Action tab is set to E-mail and should not be changed.

To change the E-mailapplication click on the Configuration tab. From

the Application pull down list, select your preferred E-mail

application.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the file type of the attachment click the Link Preferences

button to set up links. Check the Convert attachment to specified

file type box and then select the appropriate file type from the pull

down list.

15 - 18 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

File attachments

Items are mailed as file attachments using the file type you have

selected.

Convert attachments to specified file type—Click this check box if

you want to change the file type of attachments.

All documents and image items—Click this check box if you want to

convert all scanned images to the same file type.

PaperPort image items(MAX) only—Clickthis check box if you want

to convert only attachments that are PaperPort MAX files.

Combine items into single file, if possible—Click thischeckboxif you

want to combine all the attachments into one file. With this box

unchecked each scanned page will be saved in its own individual file.

File Type—Select from the pull-down list the type of file you want the

scanned images to be saved in.

PaperPort Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort Browser-Viewable (*.htm)

PaperPort Self Viewing (*.exe)

PaperPort 5.0 Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort 4.0 Image Item (*.max)

PaperPort 3.0 Image Item (*.max)

Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

PC Paintbrush (*.pcx)

PCX Multi-page (*.dcx)

JPEG (*.jpg)

TIFF-Uncompressed (*.tif)

TIFF Group 4 (*.tif)

Multi-Page -Uncompressed (*.tif)

Multi-Page - Group 4 (*.tif)

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanner settings

You have the ability to change the scanner settings used to create

the file attachments. Click on the Scan Settings tab and select the

appropriate settings.

15 - 20 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to OCR (Word Processing

program)

Scan to OCR convertsthe graphicpage image data to text which can

be edited by any word processor program. You can change the

default word processor program (example: Word Pad instead of

Word) and file type. You can also choose another OCR software

package besides the TextBridge OCR which is built into PaperPort.

To configure Scan to OCR right-click on the WordPad button and

select Configuration. The Scan Action tab is set to OCR and should

not be changed.

To change the word processing application clickon the Configuration

Tab. You can select the destination word processing application from

the Application pull down list.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the program link preferences click the Link Preferences

button.

File Type—From the pull-down list, select the file format you want to

use for documents.

OCR—Select the OCR application from the OCR pull down list.

15 - 22 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to Graphics application

(example: Microsoft Paint)

The Scan to Graphics Application allows you to scan an image so

you can edit the image. To change the default graphics application

right-click on the button and select Configuration.

The Scan Action tab is set to Application and should not be changed.

To change the configuration of the destination application click on

the Configuration Tab.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change the destination application select the appropriate

application from the Application pull down list.

To change the other configuration options click the Link Preferences

button.

This option enables you to reduce image to screen resolution

(96dpi), show a warning if the item has annotations, update the

original item if sent item is modified, if needed.

15 - 24 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy

The copy buttons can be customized to allow you to take advantage

of the features built into the Brother printer drivers to do advanced

copy functions such as n-in-1 printing.

The Copy buttons are automatically linked to the default Windows

printer driver. You can set any printer as the default printer including

non-Brother printers. Before you can use the Copy buttons you must

first configure the printer driver by right-clicking on a Copy button and

selecting Configuration.

In the Scan Settings window you can select the color mode,

resolution, paper size, brightness and contrast settings to be used.

To finish the Copy button configuration you must set the printer

driver. Click the Copy options button to display the printer driver

settings.

The copy options screen will vary depending upon which

Brother model you purchased.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select the number of Pages Per Sheet from the Scaling selections.

As an example to configure the section Copy button to copy two

pages to one you must select 2 in 1.

You must configure each of the copy buttons before they can be

used.

15 - 26 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax setting (PC-Fax using the Brother

Fax Driver)

The MFC includes a PC-Fax driver, which allows any Windows

Application to send a Fax as simply as printing a document. The

Brother SmartUI automatically configures the Fax button to use the

Brother PC-FAX driver no user configuration is required.

The Scan Action tab is set to Application and should not be changed.

To change the PC-FAX settings click the Link Preferences button

found in the configuration tab.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FAX settings

Brother PC-FAX

To change the driver settings, click on the Setup button. Select the

Paper Size, Paper Source. If you need more customized setup, click

on the Options button.

15 - 28 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select the Paper Size, Orientation (Portrait or Landscape) and

Resolution (200x200 dpi or 200x100 dpi), and click OK.

To return to the factory default settings, click the Default button.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Custom: User-defined buttons

There are up to three Custom buttons on the Brother SmartUI

Control Center. (NOTE: The number of Custom buttons depends on

which Brother model you purchased.) You can set your own

preferences and configuration to fit your required application.

To configure a Custom Button right click on the button and then click

Configuration. The configuration window will appear. You have four

function choices Application, File, OCR and Email.

Application: This setting will link the Control Panel button to any

button which appearson the PaperPort Send to Bar. Please see the

PaperPort help file for more information regarding PaperPort

compatible applications.

File: This setting allows you to save a scanned image to any

directory on local or network hard disk. You can also select the file

format to be used.

OCR: Scanned documents will be converted to editable text files. If

you have a third party OCR software package installed on your PC

you can select it. The default OCR software is TextBridge which is

built into PaperPort 8.0. You can also select the destination word

processor and file format for the editable text.

E-mail: Scanned images will be attached to an email message. You

can choose which E-mail package to use if you have more than one

installed on your system. You can also select the file type for the

attachment and create a quick send list of E-mail addresses chosen

from your default E-mail address book.

Customizing a user-defined button

To configure a Custom button right-click on the button and then click

Configuration. Please follow the following guide lines for Custom

Button configuration.

1. Select the Scan Action

Select the type of scan by clicking the appropriate button.

15 - 30 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Select Configuration for the Scan Type.

To configure the scan operation click on the Configuration Tab.

Depending upon which Scan Type button you selected you will see

a different Configuration Tab list of settings.

Application:

Select the destination application program from the pull down list.

Click on Link Preferences to set the Send to options. You can select

the application from the scroll menu on the left.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

File:

Select the file format from the Format pull down list. You can either

send the file to the default PaperPort directory or select your own

destination directory by selecting Other Folder. Use the Browse

button to select the destination directory.

15 - 32 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OCR:

Select the destination word processing application program from the

pull down list.

Clickon LinkPreferences and select the destination Application from

the scroll menu on the left. Select the File Type from the File Type

pull down list. You can also choose another OCR application from

the OCR pull down list if another is installed on you system.

Scansoft^®TextBridge^®is installed as part of the PaperPort 8.0

application.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E-mail:

Select the destination E-mail application program from the pull down

list.

Click on the Link Preferencesbutton to configure the Send To

E-mail options. You can select the File type and Quick Send E-mail

address list.

15 - 34 USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Select Scan Settings.

You can select the scanner settings from each of the Scan Type

options for the Custom buttons. You have the option to select Color

Mode, Resolution, Paper Size and Brightness and Contrast settings.

USING THE WINDOWS^®-BASED BROTHER SMARTUI CONTROL CENTER 15 - 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using MFC Remote Setup

(For Windows^®)

MFC Remote Setup

The MFC Remote Setup application lets you set up your MFC by

using the ease and speed of programming on your PC. When you

access this application, the settings on your MFC willbe downloaded

to your PC and displayed on your computerscreen. If you change the

settings, you can upload them directly to the MFC.

You can't use the MFC Remote Setup application if your MFC is

only connected to a Network with the optional Network LAN

board (NC-9100h). (See Web Based Management in the

NC-9100h User's Guide.)

OK button

When you click OK, the process of uploading the data to the MFC

begins. The MFC Remote Setup program is closed if an error

message is displayed, enter the correct data again and then click

OK.

Cancel button

The Cancel button clears your changes and exits the MFC Remote

Setup application without uploading any data to the MFC.

Apply button

The Apply button uploads the data to the MFC, but stays in the

Remote Setup application so you can make more changes.

USING MFC REMOTE SETUP 16 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print button

The Print button prints the selected items on the MFC. You cannot

print the MFC Remote Setup changes until you click the Apply

button to upload the new data to the MFC. Then you can click the

Print button to get an up-to-date printout.

Export button

Click the Export button to save your current settings to a file.

Import button

Click the Importbutton to read the settings from your saved file into

the MFC Remote Setup screen.

You can use the Export and Import buttons to save and use

several sets of settings for your MFC.

16 - 2 USING MFC REMOTE SETUP

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Brother PC-FAX

software

(For Windows^®)

PC-FAX sending

The Brother PC-FAX feature lets you send a file from your PC.

You can create a file in any application on your PC, and then send it

as a PC-FAX. You can even attach a cover page note.

All you have to do is set up the receiving parties as Members or

Groups in your PC-FAX Address Book. Then you can use the

Address Book Search feature to quickly find them to address your

fax.

■ PC-FAX is available in Black & White only.

■ If you are using Windows^®XP, Windows NT^®4.0 or

Windows^®2000 Professional, you need to log on with

administrator rights.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up user information

You can access the User Information from the FAX Sending

dialog box by clicking

See Se n ding a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile style on

page 17-15.)

(

From the Start menu, select Programs, Brother,

Brother MFL-Pro Suite, and then select PC-FAX Setup.

The Brother PC-FAX Setup dialog box will appear:

You must enter this information to create the Fax Header and

Cover Page.

Click OK to save the User Information.

17 - 2 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending setup

From the Brother PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Sending tab

to display the screen below.

The include header option sends an additional page of information

along with fax or E-mail data which contains user and subject

information.

The user has the choice of two user interfaces: Simple style or

Facsimile style. To change the user interface select the interface

setting you want: Simple style or Facsimile style.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outside line access

If you need to enter a number to access an outside line, enter it here.

This is sometimes required by a local PBX telephone system (for

example, if you must dial 9, to get an outside line in your office).

Include header

To add header information to the top of the fax pages you send,

check the Include header box.

Address Book file

You can select more than one database file to use with the Address

Book. To select you must enter the path and file name of the

database file.

—OR—

Use the Browse button to find the database to select.

17 - 4 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User interface

In the Sending tab, select user interface.

You can choose the Simple Style or the Facsimile Style.

Simple style

Facsimile style

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speed-Dial setup

From the Brother PC-FAX Setup dialog box, click the Speed Dial

tab. (To use this feature you must select the Facsimile Style user

interface.)

You can register a Member or Group on each of the ten Speed-Dial

buttons.

To register an address in a Speed-Dial button:

Click the Speed-Dial button you want to program.

Click the Member or Group you want to store on the Speed-Dial

button.

Click Add >> to save it.

To clear a Speed-Dial button:

Click the Speed-Dial button you want to clear.

Click Clear to erase it.

17 - 6 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Address Book

From the Start menu, select Programs, Brother,

Brother MFL-Pro Suite, and then click PC-FAX Address Book.

The Brother Address Book dialog box will appear:

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up a Member in the Address Book

In the Brother Address Book dialog box you can add, edit and

delete stored information of Members and Groups.

In the Address Book dialog box, click the

Member.

icon to add a

The Brother Address Book Member Setup dialog box will

appear:

In the MemberSetup dialog box, type the Member’s information.

Name is a required field. Click OK to save the information.

17 - 8 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up a Group for Broadcasting

If you often send the same PC-FAX to several Members, you can

combine them in a Group.

In the Brother Address Book dialog box, click the

create a Group.

icon to

The Group Setup dialog box appears:

Type the name of the new Group in the Group Name field.

In the Available Names box, select each Member to be

included in the Group, and then click Add >>.

Members you add to the Group will be added to the

Group Members box.

After all the members you want have been added, click OK.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing Member information

Select the Member or Group you want to edit.

Click the edit icon.

Change the Member or Group information.

Click OK to save your changes.

Deleting a Member or Group

Select the Member or Group you want to delete.

Click the delete icon.

When the Confirm Item Delete dialog box appears, click OK.

Exporting the Address Book

You can export the whole Address Book to an ASCII text file (*.csv).

Or if you wish, you can select and create a Vcard that will be attached

to that Member’s outgoing E-mail. (AVcard is an electronic business

card that contains the sender’s contact information.)

To export the whole current Address book:

If you are creating a Vcard, you must first select the member.

If you select Vcard in Step 1, Save as type: will be Vcard (*.vcf)

From the Address Book select File, point to Export, and then

click Text.

—OR—

Click Vcard and go to Step 5.

From the Available Items column, select the data fields you

wish to Export and then click Add >>.

Select the items in the order you want them listed.

If you are exporting to an ASCII file, select the Divide Character

- Tab or Comma. This selects between a Tab or Comma to

separate the data fields.

17 - 10 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select OK to save the data.

Type the name of the file, and then select Save.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Importing to the Address Book

You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or Vcards (electronic business

cards) into your Address Book.

To import an ASCII text file:

From the Address Book select File, point to Import, and then

click Text.

—OR—

Click Vcard and go to Step 5.

From the Available Items column select the data fields you

want to Import, and click Add >>.

From the Available Items list select the fields in the same order

they are listed in the Import text file.

Select the Divide Character - Tabor Comma based on the file

format you are importing.

To import the data click OK.

17 - 12 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type the name of the file, and then select Open.

If you selected a text file in Step 1, the Files of type: will be

Text file (*.csv).

Setting up a Cover Page

From the PC-FAX dialog box click

to access the PC-Fax Cover

page setup screen. (See Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the

Facsimile style on page 17-15.)

The Brother PC-FAX Cover Page Setup dialog box will appear:

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can enter information in each field

If you are sending a fax to more than one recipient, the recipient

information will not be printed on the Cover Page.

From

Comment

Type the comment you want to add to the cover page.

Select Cover Page Form

Select the cover page format you want to use.

Import BMP file

You can insert a bitmap file, such as your company logo, in the cover

page.

Use the browse button to select the BMP file, and then select the

alignment style.

Count Cover Page

When the Count Cover Page box is checked, the Cover Page will be

included in the page numbering. When this box is not checked, the

Cover Page will not be included.

17 - 14 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Facsimile

style

Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw oranyother application

on your PC.

From the File menu, select Print.

The Print dialog box will appear:

Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then click OK.

The Fax Sending dialog box will appear.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter the fax number using any of the following methods:

■ Using the dial pad enter the number.

■ Click any of the 10 Speed-Dial buttons.

■ Click the Address Book button, and then select a Member

or Group from the Address Book.

If you make a mistake you can click Clear to delete all the

entries.

To include a Cover Page, click

Cover Page On, and then

click the Cover Page

information.

icon to enter or edit the Cover Page

Click Start to send the fax.

If you want to cancel the fax, click Stop.

Redial

If you want to redial a number, click Redial to scroll through the last

five fax numbers, and then click Start.

Sending a file as a PC-FAX using the Simple style

Create a file in Word, Excel, Paint, Draw or any other application

on your PC.

From the File menu, select Print.

The Print dialog box will appear:

17 - 16 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then click OK.

The FAX Sending dialog box will appear:

In the To: field, type the fax number of the recipient. You can

also use the Address Book to select destination fax numbers by

clicking the To: button. If you made a mistake entering a

number, click the Clear button to delete all the entries.

To send a Cover Page and note, click the Cover Page Oncheck

box.

You can also click the

icon to create or edit a cover page.

When you are ready to send your fax, click the Send

If you wish to cancel the fax, click the Cancel icon.

icon.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting up PC-FAX receiving

(Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000

Professional and Windows NT^®WS 4.0 only)

Running PC-FAX Receiving

From the Startmenu, select Programs, Brother, Brother MFL- Pro

Suite and then select ‘PC-FAX Receiving’.

The PC-FAX

icon will appear on your PC Task

bar for this Windows^®session.

Setting up your PC

Right-click the PC-FAX

Task Bar, and then click PC-Fax RX Setup.

icon on your PC

The PC-Fax RX Setup dialog box will appear:

In Ring Delay, select the number of rings before you want your

PC to answer Incoming calls.

In Save file to, use the Browse button if you want to change the

path where PC-FAX files will be saved.s

In File Format, select .tif or .max for the format the received

document will be saved in. The default format is .tif.

If you want to, you can check the Play wave file when

receiving FAX check box, and then enter the path.

To load PC FAX receiving automatically when you start up

Windows^®, select the Add to Startup folder check box.

17 - 18 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing new PC-FAX messages

Each time you start to receive a PC-FAX, the icon will flash

blue and red. Once the fax has been received the icon will remain

red. The red icon will change to green once the received fax has

been received.

Run PaperPort.

Open the Fax Received folder.

Double-click any of the new faxes to open and view them.

The title of your unread PC message will be the date and time

until you assign a file name.

For example “Fax 2-20-2002 16:40:21.tif”

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Receiving a fax into the PC

(Windows^®XP only)

How to receive a fax automatically

Before you can start receiving faxes, please install the appropriate

Windows XP driver (Windows XP In-box driver or Brother Windows

XP driver). After the driver is installed, refer to the following

information to configure your Windows XP PC for Fax receiving.

To activate Faxing receiving, click Set up faxing in the Printer

Tasks menu.

The FAX services will be installed on your PC.

A Fax icon will then appear in the Printers and Faxes folder. If

the Fax icon does not appear, clickInstall a local fax printer in

the Printer tasks menu.

17 - 20 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select the Start, All Programs, Accessories,

Communications, Fax, Fax Console.

If you have not configured your fax connection, the following

screen will be displayed.

Enter your details, ensuring you specify the outside line access

number if necessary and click OK.

Select the My location radio button if it is not selected and then

click OK.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Fax Configuration Wizard starts. Click Next.

Enter the sender information, and then click Next.

Select Brother MFC-8420 or MFC-8820D in the Please select

the fax device pull-down list. Click to select the Enable

Receive check box. Specify the number of rings before your

MFC will attempt to answer the fax. Click Next.

17 - 22 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter the Transmitting Subscriber Identification (TSID), and

then click Next.

Enter the Called Subscriber Identification (CSID), and then

click Next.

10 Select if you print a received fax or save it in a folder, and then

click Next.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11 Click Finish.

When PC-FAX Receiving is active, you cannot run the Remote

Setup utility. To use Remote Setup, check off Enable Receive

in Step 7.

For information on how to use PC-FAX Sending and Receiving,

please refer to Help in the Fax Console.

The PC-FAX installation is now complete.

17 - 24 USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to view the received faxes

Faxes that are received into the PC will appear in the Fax Console.

Click Start, point to All Programs, Accessories,

Communications, Fax, and then click Fax Consoleto open the Fax

Console. In the left pane, expand the Fax folder (if it is not already

expanded).

The Fax folder contains the following folders:

■ The Incoming folder contains faxes that are currently being

received.

■ The Inbox folder contains faxes that have been received.

■ The Outbox folder contains faxes that are scheduled to be sent.

■ The Sent Items folder contains faxes that have been successfully

sent.

USING BROTHER PC-FAX SOFTWARE 17 - 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using your MFC with a

Macintosh^®

Setting up your USB-equipped Apple^®

Macintosh^®

■ Before you can connect the MFC to your Macintosh^®, you

must buy a USB cable that is not longer than 6 feet (1.8

metres).

Do not connect the MFC to a USB port on a key board or

a non-powered USB hub.

■ Some descriptions in this chapter are based on the

MFC-8820D. These descriptions also apply to the

MFC-8420 and MFC-8820DN.

The features supported by the MFC will depend on the operating

system you are using. The chart below shows which features are

supported.

Feature

Mac OS^®

Mac OS ^®X

8.6

9.X

10.1

10.2.1

or greater*

Printing

Yes

Scanning (TWAIN)

PC-FAX sending

Remote Setup

Yes

*1 For Mac OS^®X 10.2 users, please upgrade to Mac OS^®X 10.2.1

or greater. (For the latest information for Mac OS^®X, please visit at:

http://solutions.brother.com)

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Brother printer driver with

your Apple^®Macintosh^®

(Mac OS^®8.6-9.2)

To select a Printer:

Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.

Click the Brother Laser icon. On the right side of the Chooser

window, click the printer you want to print to. Close the

Chooser.

18 - 2 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To print a document:

From the application software such as Presto!^®PageManager^®,

click File menu and select Page Setup. You can change the

settings for Paper Size, Orientation, and Scaling, and then

click OK.

From application software such as Presto!^®PageManager^®,

click File menu and select Print. Click Print to start printing.

If you want to changeCopies, Pages, Resolution, Paper Source

and Media Type, select your settings before clicking Print.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Device Options allows you to select Duplex.

Automatic Duplex is only available with the MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN.

18 - 4 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Brother Printer Driver with

Your Apple^®Macintosh^®(Mac OS^®X)

Choosing page setup options

From application software such as Presto!^®PageManager^®,

click the File menu and select Page Setup. Make sure

MFC-8420, MFC-8820D or MFC-8820DN is selected in the

Format for pop-up menu. You can change the settings for

Paper Size, Orientation and Scaling, then click OK.

From application software such as Presto!^®PageManager^®,

click File menu and select Print. Click Print to start printing.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specific settings

Set the Media Type, Resolution, Toner Save, and other settings.

Press Copies & Pages to select settings you want to change.

Duplex

Automatic Duplex is only available with the MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN.

18 - 6 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer settings

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the PS driver with your Apple^®

Macintosh^®

To use the PS driver on a Network, see the NC-9100h Network

User’s Guide on CD-ROM.

To use the PS driver with a USB cable, you need to set the

Emulationto BR-Script3(Menu, 4,1) before connecting

the USB cable. (See Se t t ing the Emulation Selecti o n on page

11 -17.)

The PS driver does not support the following functions:

■ HQ 1200

■ Secure Print

■ PC-Fax Sending

For Mac OS^®8.6 to 9.2 users

For Mac OS^®8.6 to 9.04 Users:

Open the Apple Extras folder. Open the Apple LaserWriter

Software folder.

For Mac OS^®9.1 to 9.2 Users:

Open the Applications (Mac OS^®9) folder. Open the Utilities

folder*.

* The screens are based on Mac^®OS 9.04.

18 - 8 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Open the Desktop Printer Utility icon.

Select Printer (USB), and then click OK.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Click Change... in the PostScript^TMPrinter Description (PPD)

file.

Select Brother MFC-8820D, and then click Select.

Click Change... in the USB Printer Selection.

Select Brother MFC-8820D, and then click OK.

18 - 10 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Click Create....

Enter your MFC name (MFC-8820D), and then click Save.

Select Quit from the File menu.

Click the MFC-8820D icon on the Desktop.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10 Select Set Default Printer from the Printing menu.

For Mac OS^®X users

You need to install the PS driver using the following instructions.

■ If you use a USB cable and your Macintosh^®is “Mac OS^®X”,

only one printer driver for an MFC can be registered in Print

Center.

■ If a Brother Native Driver (MFC-XXX) is already listed in

Printer list, you will need to delete it and then install the PS

driver.

■ To use the PS driver with a USB cable, you need to set the

Emulationto BR-Script3(Menu, 4,1) before

connecting the USB cable. (See Setting the Emulation

Selection on page 11-17.)

Select Applications from the Go menu.

18 - 12 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Open the Utilities folder.

Open the Print Center icon.

Click Add Printer… .

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select USB.

Select MFC-8820D, and then click Add.

Select Quit Printer Center from the Print Center menu.

18 - 14 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending a fax from your Macintosh^®

application

For Mac OS^®8.6-9.2 users

You can send a fax directly from a Macintosh^®application by doing

the following:

Create a document in a Macintosh application.

To send a fax, select Print from the File menu.

The Printer dialog box will appear:

When Printer is selected, the top button shows Print and the

Address button is grayed.

From the Output pull-down menu, select Facsimile.

When Facsimile is selected, the top button changes to Send

Fax and the Address button will be available.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Click Send Fax.

The Send Fax dialog box appears:

The Send Fax dialog box has two list boxes. The left box shows

all the previously Stored Fax Numbersand the right box shows

the Destination Fax Numbers as you select them.

To address the fax, type a fax number in the Input Fax Number

box.

When you are finished addressing your fax, click Send Fax.

To select and only send certain pagesof the document, clickOK

to go to the Print dialog box.

If you click Send Fax without addressing your fax, the following

error message will appear:

Click OK to go to the Send Fax dialog box.

18 - 16 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For Mac OS^®X users

You can send a fax directly from a Macintosh^®application by doing

the following:

Create a document in a Macintosh application.

To send a fax, select Print from the File menu.

The Printer dialog box will appear:

Select Send Fax from pull-down menu.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Facsimile from the Output pull-down menu.

To address the fax, type a fax number in the Input Fax

Numbers box, and the click Print.

If you want to send a fax to more than one number, click Add

after entering the first fax number. The destination fax numbers

will be listed in the dialog box.

18 - 18 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Drag a vCard from the Mac OS^®X Address Book

application

Click Address Book button.

Drag a vCard from the Mac OS^®X Address Book application

to the Destination Fax Numbers filed.

When you are finished addressing your fax, click Print.

The vCard used must contain a work fax or home fax number.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When you choose work fax or home fax from the Stored Fax

Numbers pull-down list, only the fax number stored in the

Mac OS^®X Address Book for the selected category will be

used. If the fax number is stored in only one of the Mac OS^®X

Address Book categories, the number will be retrieved no matter

which category you have selected (work or home).

18 - 20 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Brother TWAIN scanner

driver with your Macintosh^®

The Brother MFC software includes a TWAIN Scanner driver for

Macintosh^®. You can use this Macintosh^®TWAIN Scanner driver

with any applications that support the TWAIN specifications.

Mac OS^®X Scanning is supported in Mac OS^®X 10.2.1 or

greater.

Accessing the scanner

Run your Macintosh^®TWAIN-compliant application software. The

first time you use the Brother TWAIN driver (MFL Pro/P2500), set it

as the default by choosing Select Source (or the other menu name

to select the device). Afterwards, for each document you scan

choose Acquire Image or Scan. The scanner setup dialog box will

appear.

The screen shown in this section are from Mac OS^®9. The

screen on your Macintosh^®may vary depending on your

Operating System.

The method of selecting the source or choosing to scan may

vary depending on the application software you are using.

(OS 8. 6–9.2)

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning an image into your Macintosh^®

You can scan a whole page

—OR—

scan a portion after prescanning the document.

Scanning a whole page

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Adjust the following settings, if needed, in the Scanner Setup

dialog box:

Resolution

Color Type

Scanning Area

Brightness

Contrast

Click Start.

When scanning has finished, the image will appear in your

graphics application.

18 - 22 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PreScanning an image

PreScanning allowsyou to scan an image quickly at a low resolution.

A thumbnail version will appear in the Scanning Area. This is only a

preview of the image, so you can see how it will look. The PreScan

button will allow you to crop unwanted areas from the images. When

you are satisfied with the preview, click Start to scan the image.

Insert the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Click PreScan.

The whole image will be scanned into your Macintosh^®and will

appear in the Scanning Area of the Scanner dialog box:

To scan a portion of the prescanned image, click and drag the

mouse to crop it.

Insert original in the ADF, if you are using ADF.

Make your adjustments to the settings for Resolution,

Color Type (Gray Scale), Brightness, Contrast, and Size in

the Scanner Setup dialog box.

Click Start.

This time only the cropped area of the original will appear in the

Scanning Area.

In your editing software, you can refine the image.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Settings in the Scanner window

Image

Resolution

From the Resolutionpop-up menu choose the scanning resolution.

Higher resolutions use more memory and transfer time, but produce

a finer scanned image.

18 - 24 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Type

Black & White—Set the image Type to Black and White for text or

line art. For photographic images, set the image type to Gray (Error

diffusion) or True Gray.

Gray (Error Diffusion)—is used for documents with photographic

images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating

simulated gray images by placing black dots instead of the true gray

dots in a specific matrix instead of true gray dots.)

True Gray—is used for documents with photographic images or

graphics. This mode is more exact because it usesup to 256 shades

of gray. It requires the most memory and takes the longest transfer

time.

Colors—Choose either 8-bit Color, which scans up to 8-bit Color or

24-bit Color which scans up to 16.8 million colors. Although using

24-bit Color creates an image with the most accurate colors, the

image file willbe about three timeslarger than a file created with 8-bit

Color.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanning Area

Set the Size to one of the following:

■ Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)

■ A4 (210 × 297 mm)

■ Legal (8 1/2 × 14 in.)

■ A5 (148 × 210 mm)

■ B5 (182 × 257 mm)

■ Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)

■ Business Card (90 × 60 mm)

■ Custom (user adjustable it from 0.35 × 0.35 in. to 8.5 × 11.69 in.

or 8.9 × 8.9 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

After you choose a custom size, you can adjust the scanning area.

Click and hold the mouse button as you drag the mouse to crop the

image.

Width: Enter the width of the custom size.

Height: Enter the height of the custom size.

Business Card Size

To scan business cards, select the Business Card size (90 × 60 mm)

and place the business card at the center of scanner glass.

When you are scanning photographs or other images to use in a

word processor or other graphics application, it is a good idea to try

different settings for the Contrast, Mode and Resolution to determine

which settings look the best.

18 - 26 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the Image

Brightness

Adjust the Brightness setting to get the best image. The Brother

TWAIN Scanner driver offers 100 Brightness levels (-50 to 50). The

default value is 0, representing an ‘average’ setting.

You can set the Brightness level by dragging the slide bar to the

right to lighten the image or to the left to darken the image. You can

also type a value in the box to set the level. Click OK.

If the scanned image is too light, set a lower Brightness level and

scan the image again.

If the image is too dark, set a higher Brightness level and scan the

image again.

Contrast

You can only adjust the Contrast level when you have selected one

of the Gray Scale settings, it isnot available when you have selected

Black & White as the selected Color Type.

Increasing the Contrast level (by dragging the slide bar to the right)

emphasizes dark and light areas of the image, while reducing the

Contrast level (by dragging the slide bar to the left) reveals more

detail in the gray areas. Instead of using the slide bar, you can type

a value in the box to set the Contrast. Click OK.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Presto!^®PageManager^®

Presto!^®PageManager^®is application software for managing the

documents in your computer. Since it is compatible with most image

editors and word processing programs, Presto!^®PageManager^®

gives you unmatched control over your computer files. You can

easily manage your documents and edit your E-mail files, and read

documents with the OCR software built into Presto!^®

PageManager^®.

If you use the MFC as a scanner, we recommend that you install

Presto!^®PageManager^®. To install Presto!^®PageManager^®, see

Quick Setup Guide on pages 42 to 49.

The complete NewSoft Presto!^®PageManager^®4.0 User’s

Guide can be found on the Macintosh CD-ROM supplied with

your MFC.

Highlights

■ OCR: Scan an image, recognize the text, and edit it with a word

processor.

■ Scan Buttons: In one step scan documents and open them with

a designated program.

■ Image Editing: Enhance, crop and rotate images, or open them

with an image-editing program of your choice.

■ Annotation: Add removable notes, stamps, and drawings to

images.

■ Treeview Window: View and arrange your folder hierarchy for

easy access.

■ Thumbnail Window: View files as thumbnails for easy

identification.

18 - 28 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System requirements

■ PowerPC processor

■ System 8.6, 9X, 10.1, or greater

■ CD-ROM drive

■ Hard disk drive with at least 120 MB of free disk space

Recommended:

■ 256 color or higher video adapter.

■ Eudora Mail, or Outlook Express electronic mail software

Technical Support

For USA

Newsoft America Inc.

Postal Address:

Telephone:

FAX:

4113 Clipper Court Fremont, CA 94538, USA

510-4458600

510-4458601

E-mail Address:

URL:

con[email protected]

http://www.newsoftinc.com/

For Canada

E-mail Address:

con[email protected]

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MFC Remote Setup (Mac OS^®X)

The MFC Remote Setup application allowsyou to quickly set up your

MFC by taking advantage of the ease and speed of programming on

your Macintosh^®. When you access this application, the settings on

your MFC will be downloaded automatically to your Macintosh^®and

displayed on your computer screen. If you change the settings, you

can upload them directly to the MFC.

The ‘MFC Remote Setup’ application icon is in Macintosh

HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utility.

This starts the process of uploading the data to the MFC and exiting

the remote setup program. If an error message is displayed enter the

correct data again. Click OK.

Cancel

This exits the remote setup application without uploading the data to

the MFC.

Apply

This uploads the data to the MFC, but does not exit the remote setup

application.

This command prints the selected items on the MFC. You can not

print the data until it is uploaded to the MFC. Click Apply to upload

the new data to the MFC and click Print.

18 - 30 USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Export

This command saves the current configuration settings to a file.

Import

This command reads the settings from a file.

USING YOUR MFC WITH A MACINTOSH^®18 - 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Scanning

(Windows^®98/98SE/Me/2000

Professional and XP only)

To use the MFC as a Network Scanner, the NC-9100h Network

board should be installed into the MFC (MFC-8820DN standard)and

configured with TCP/IP and mail server settings if you use Scan to

E-mail (E-mail server). You can set or change NC-9100h settings

from the control panel or with the BRAdmin Professional utility or

Web Management. (Please see the NC-9100h User's Guide on the

CD-ROM.)

Registering your PC with the MFC

If you need to change the MFC that was registered to your PC during

the installation of MFL-Pro (see Quick Setup Guide on page 38),

follow the steps below.

For Windows^®98/Me/2000

From the Start menu, select Control panel, Scanners and

Cameras, and then right-click Scanner Device icon and select

Properties to view the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.

For Windows^®XP

From the Start menu, select Control panel, Printers and

Other Hardware, Scanner and Cameras (or Control panel,

Scanners and Cameras).

NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Right-click Scanner Device icon and select properties to view

the Network Scanner Properties dialog box.

Click the Network Setting tab in the dialog box and select a

method to specify the MFC as a Network scanner for your PC.

Specify your MFC by address

Enter the actual IP address of the MFC in the IP Address field.

Click Apply and then OK.

Specify your MFC by Name

Enter the MFC Node name in the Node Name field.

Click Apply and then OK.

19 - 2 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XPONLY)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Search from a list of available device

Click Browse and select the appropriate device you want to use.

Click OK.

Click Apply and then OK.

Click the Scan To Button tab in the dialog box and enter your

PC Name in the Display Name field. The MFC's LCD displays

the Name you enter. Default setting is your PC Name. You can

enter a name if you like.

You can avoid receiving unwanted documents by setting a

4-digit PIN Number. Enter your PIN Number in the PIN Number

and Retype PIN Number field. To send data to a PC protected

by a PIN Number, the LCD prompts to enter the PIN Number

before the document can be scanned and sent to the MFC. (See

Using the Sc a n k ey on page 19-4 to 19-8.)

NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Scan key

Scan to E-mail (PC)

When you select Scan to E-mail (PC) your original will be scanned

and sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. The

Brother SmartUI will activate the default E-mail application on the

designated PC for addressing to the recipient. You can scan a black

and white or color original and it will be sent with the E-mail from the

PC as an attachment.

For Network Scanning the Brother Control Center (SmartUI)

selections are used only for configuring the Scanbutton. You

will not be able to initiate a Network scan from the Brother

Control Center (SmartUI).

You can change the

(Scan) configuration. For Windows^®

98/98SE/Me/2000: (See Scan to E-mail on page 14-10 to 14-11.)

(For Windows^®XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to

button configuration on page 15-5 to 15 -9.)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Press

(Scan).

to select Scan

▲ Scan to E-mail

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

to E-mail.

Press Set.

Press

to select PC.

Press Set.

—OR—

If there isn't other selection, go to Step 5.

Press or to select the destination PC you want to use

for E-mailing your original.

Press Set.

If the LCD prompts you to entera PIN Number, enter the 4-digit

PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

19 - 4 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XPONLY)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to E-mail (E-mail server)

When you select Scan to E-mail(E-mailserver) you can scan a black

and white or color original and send it directly to an E-mail address

from the MFC. Youroriginal is sent as an E-mailattachment in a TIFF

format for Blackand White or you can choose PDF or JPEG for color.

Scan to E-mail (E-mail Server) requires SMTP/POP3 mail

server support. (See NC-9100h User’s Guide on the CD-ROM)

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Press

(Scan).

to select Scan to E-mail.

Press

Press Set.

Press

E-mail Server.

to select

▲ Scan to E-mail

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

Press Set.

—OR—

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

If there isn't other selection, go to Step 5.

Press

to select Change Quality.

Press Set.

Press

to select Color 150 dpi, Color 300

dpi, Color 600 dpi, B/W 200 dpior B/W 200×100 dpi.

Press Set.

If you select B/W 200 dpiorB/W 200×100 dpiin Step 6, go

to Step 8.

—OR—

If you select Color 150 dpi, Color 300 dpiorColor 600

dpiin Step 6, go to Step 7.

Press

to select PDFor JPEG.

Press Set.

The LCD prompts you to enter an address. Enter the destination E-mail

addressfromthedialpad or use theOne-TouchkeyorSpeed-Dialkey.

Press Start.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to Image

When you select Scan to Image your original will be scanned and

sent directly to the PC you designated on your network. The Brother

SmartUI will activate the default graphics application on the

designated PC. You can change the Scan configuration. (For

Windows^®98/Me/2000: See Scan to Image on page 14-14.) (For

Windows^®XP: S e e Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to button

con f i gurati o n on page 15-5 to 15-10.)

For Network Scanning the Brother Control Center (SmartUI)

selections are used only for configuring the Scanbutton. You

will not be able to initiate a network scan from the Brother

Control Center (SmartUI).

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Press

(Scan).

to select Scan

Press

to Image.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press

destination you want to send.

to select a

Press Set.

If the LCD prompts you to entera PIN Number, enter the 4-digit

PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

19 - 6 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XPONLY)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to OCR

When you select Scan to OCR your original will be scanned and sent

directlyto the PCyou designated on your network. The BrotherSmartUI

will activate ScanSoft^®TextBridge^®and convert your original into text

for viewing and editing from a word processing application on the

designated PC.You can change the Scan configuration.

(For Windows^®98/Me/2000: S e e Scan to OCR (Word Processor) on

page 14-12 to 14 -13.) (For Windows^®XP: See Hardware Section:

Changing the Scan to button configuration on page 15-5 to 15-11.)

For Network Scanning the Brother Control Center (SmartUI)

selections are used only for configuring the Scan button. You

will not be able to initiate a network scan from the Brother

Control Center (SmartUI).

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Press

(Scan).

to select Scan

Press

to OCR.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press

destination you want to send.

to select a

Press Set.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN Number, enter the 4-digit

PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XP ONLY) 19 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scan to File

When you select Scan to File you can scan a black and white or color

original and send it directly to a PC you designate on your network. The

file will be saved in the folder and file format that you have configured in

the Brother SmartUI on the designated PC. You can change the Scan

configuration.

(For Windows^®98/Me/2000: See Scan to File on page 14-8 to 14 -9.)

(For Windows^®XP: See Hardware Section: Changing the Scan to

button configuration on page 15-5 to 15 -11.)

For Network Scanning the Brother Control Center (SmartUI)

selections are used only for configuring the Scanbutton. You

will not be able to initiate a network scan from the Brother

Control Center (SmartUI).

Place the original face up in the ADF, or face down on the

scanner glass.

Press

(Scan).

to select Scan

Press

to File.

▲ Scan to E-mail

Scan to Image

Scan to OCR

▼ Scan to File

Select ▲▼ & Set

Press Set.

Press

destination you want to send.

to select a

Press Set.

If the LCD prompts you to entera PIN Number, enter the 4-digit

PIN Number for the destination PC on the control panel.

Press Set.

The MFC will start the scanning process.

Max. 25 clientscan be connected to one MFC on a Network. For

example, if 30 clients try to connect at a time, 5 clients will not

be shown on the LCD.

19 - 8 NETWORK SCANNING (WINDOWS^®98/98SE/ME/2000 PROFESSIONAL AND XPONLY)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother Network PC-FAX

software

To use the MFC as a Network PC-FAX, the NC-9100h Network

board should be installed into the MFC (MFC-8820DN standard)and

configured with TCP/IP and mail server settings if you use Scan to

E-mail (E-mail server). (See Using Brother P C -FAX software on

page 17-1.)

Enable Network PC-FAX

To use the MFC for Network PC-FAX, see Usi n g B rother PC-FAX

software on page 17-1.

The items described below are specific items relating to the

Network version of PC-FAX software that is installed from the

"Optional network applications" on the CD-ROM supplied with

your MFC.

Brother Network PC-FAXcan be configured through PC-FAX Setup,

Sending tab.

Sending setup

In order to use the full functionality of Network PC-FAX it is strongly

recommended that you enable the Network PC-FAX Setup option on

the Sending tab Brother PC-FAX Setup.

Access the Sending Tab from the PC-FAX dialog box by

clicking

—OR—

From the Start menu, select Al l programs, Brother, Brother

MFL-Pro Suite, and then select PC-FAX Setup.

BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Check Enable box.

This software can be used in a network environment and with a

locally connected machine. It is important that when used in a

network environment the Network PC Fax is set to enable.

20 - 2 BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAXSOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Extra options in Address Book

When the Enable Network PC-FAX option is selected, three

additional options appear in the address book contact window.

In the Address Book dialog box, click the

member.

icon to add a

The Brother Address Book Member Setup dialog box will

appear:

In the Brother Address Book Member Setup dialog box,

type the member's information.

Name is required field. You can also enter an E-mail contact

address and MFC address for the address book member.

To send to this contact it is necessary to specify which is the

preferred method of sending a document to this contact by

checking the Fax, E-mail or MFC E-mail Address box next to

the contact.

Click the OK button to save the member's information.

If you wish to send a document to this contact by more than one

method you must create a second contact and select a different

option, Fax, E-Mail or MFC Address.

BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing Network PC-FAX

Insert the CD-ROM supplied with your Brother MFC, the installer

screen will automatically start. From the installer screen select your

model and language (if these options are present), then select

Network Applications for (optional NC-9100h Print / Fax Server),

then select Brother PC-FAX and follow the screen prompts. When

prompted reboot your PC.

Windows^®95/98/98SE and Me users

It isnow necessary to install the Brother Network Print Software from

the CD-ROM so you need to reinsert the CD-ROM. Select Network

Applications for (optional NC-9100h Print / Fax Server), then select

Network Print Software. Follow the screen prompts, you will

prompted for the IP address of the NC-9100h. If in any doubt contact

your Network Administrator.

To check select Start, Settings and Printers

Highlight the Brother PC-FAX driver from the list and right click the

mouse button and select Properties then select the Ports tab.

Select the “Print to Following Port” as illustrated above, if Brother

LPR Port is listed for your MFC you can just specify for Brother

NetworkFax to use thispreviously installed port. If you have multiple

Brother LPR ports please ensure that you select the correct port

address. If in any doubt please contact your Network Administrator.

If the installer screen does not appear automatically select

Start, Run and type X:/setup.exe

(X:/ should be the drive letter of your CD ROM drive on your PC).

20 - 4 BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAXSOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Brother Network PC-FAX software

The Brother Network PC-FAX feature allows you to use your PC to

send any application or document file as a standard fax. You can

create a file in any application on your PC, and then send it as a

Network PC-FAX. You can even attach a cover page note. All you

have to do is set up the receiving parties as Members or Groups in

your PC-FAX Address Book or simply enter the destination address

orfaxnumber into the User Interface. You can use the Address Book

Search feature to quickly find members to send your fax.

Please check Brother Solutions Center for the latest updates

available for Brother Network PC-FAX. Visit

http://solutions.brother.com/

Quick Tips:

Please see Enable Network PC-FAX on page 20-1 before using

Brother Network PC-FAX.

Ensure that Network PC-FAX is set to “Enable” in the Sending

tab of Setup. (S e e Enable Network PC-FAX on page 20-1.)

BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAX SOFTWARE 20 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To send an E-mailfrom Brother NetworkPC-FAX you can either

enter the E-mail address in the To: field or in the display for

Facsimile Style using the PC keyboard or select the member

from the AddressBook. The member must have E-mail selected

as the chosen destination for that member.

To send an Internet Fax from Brother Network PC-FAX you can

either enter the Internet Fax address in the To: field or in the

display for Facsimile style using the PC keyboard or select the

member from the Address Book. The member must have MFC

Mail Address selected as the chosen destination for that

member.

To send a Network Fax simply select a member from the

address book or enter the fax number into the User Interface

with the PC keyboard. The member must have Fax selected as

the chosen destination for that member.

Sending a Network PC-Fax to an E-mail address or sending an

Internet Fax requires SMTP/POP3 mail server support.

Sending a Network PC-FAX from your Macintosh^®

application

You can send a fax directly from your Macintosh^®application using

the following steps:

For Mac OS 8.6-9.2 users

Follow the steps on pages 46 and 47 in the Quick Setup Guide.

Follow the steps on pages 18-15 and 18-16.

For Mac OS X users

Follw the steps on pages 48 and 49 in the Quick Setup Guide.

Follow the steps on pages 18-17 to 18 -20.

20 - 6 BROTHER NETWORK PC-FAXSOFTWARE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important information

Standard telephone and FCC Notices

These notices are in effect on models sold and

used only in the United States.

When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to

emergency numbers:

■ Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the

reason for the call before hanging up.

■ Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early

morning or late evening.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the

requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the backside of this

equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a

product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested,

this number must be provided to the telephone company.

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by

means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ11C.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises

wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC

Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant

telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is

designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also

compliant. See installation instructions for details.

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be

connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line

may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.

In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five

(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected

to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local

telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the

REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the

format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits represented by ## are the

REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier

products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the

telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary

discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice

isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as

soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a

complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities,

equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation

of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company willprovide

advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to

maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty

information, please contact Brother Customer Service. (See Brother

numbers on page i.) If the equipment is causing harm to the

telephone network, the telephone company may request that you

disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the

state public utility commission, public service commission or

corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the

telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not

disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will

disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified

installer.

If you are not able to solve a problem with your MFC, call Brother

Customer Service. (See B r o ther numbers on page i.)

WARNING

For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect

all cables from the walloutlet before servicing, modifying or installing

the equipment.

This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by

the telephone company or connected to party lines.

Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may

be the result of your use of this information, including direct, special

or consequential damages. There are no warranties extended or

granted by this document.

21 - 2 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

This MFC has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which

are applied to the USA only. A grounded plug should be plugged into

a grounded AC outlet after checking the rating of the local power

supply for the MFC to operate properly and safely.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Declaration of Conformity (USA only)

Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

TEL: (908) 704-1700

declares, that the products

Product Name: MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN

comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits

for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

■ Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother

Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Important – about the interface cable

Ashielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with

the limits for a Class B digital device.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

(Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme

NMB-003 du Canada.

International ENERGY STA R^®Compliance Statement

The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR Program is to

promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient

office equipment.

As an E^{NE RG Y}STA R Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. hasdetermined

that this product meets the E^{NE RG Y}STAR guidelines for energy

efficiency.

Laser safety

This equipment is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation

Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health

and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the equipment does not

produce hazardous laser radiation.

21 - 4 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Since radiation emitted inside the equipment is completely confined

within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam

cannot escape from the MFC during any phase of user operation.

FDA regulations

U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented

regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,

1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United

States. The following label on the back of the MFC indicates

compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser

products marketed in the United States.

Manufactured:

BROTHER CORP. (ASIA) LTD.

BROTHER BUJI NAN LING FACTORY

Gold Garden Industry, Nan Ling Village, Buji, Rong Gang,

Shenzhen, China.

This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards,

21 CFR Subchapter J.

WARNING

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous invisible

radiation exposure.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother

Industries, Ltd. may void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Internal laser radiation

Max. Radiation Power

Wave Length

5 mW

760 - 810 nm

Laser Class

Class IIIb (Accordance with 21 CFR

Part 1040.10)

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important safety instructions

Read all of these instructions.

Save them for later reference.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

Switch off before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

Do not use this product near water.

Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.

The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are

provided for ventilation; to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must

not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be

blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other

similar surface. This product should never be placed near or

over a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed

in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

This product should be operated from the type of power source

indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the type of power

available, call your dealer or local power company.

Use only the power cord supplied with this MFC.

This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug, a plug

having a third (grounded) pin. This plug will only fit into a

grounded power outlet. This isa safety feature. If you are unable

to insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace

your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounded

plug.

10 Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not place

this product where people can walk on the cord.

11 If an extension cord isused with this product, make sure that the

total ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension

cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also,

make sure that the total of all products plugged into the wall

outlet does not exceed 15 amperes (USA only).

12 Do not place anything in front of the MFC that will block received

faxes. Do not place anything in the path of received faxes.

21 - 6 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13 Wait until pages have exited the MFC before picking them up.

14 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet

slots, since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short

out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill

liquid of any kind on the product. Do not attempt to service this

product yourself because opening or removing covers may

expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and

may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to a Brother

Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest

Brother Authorized Service Center, please call In USA:

1-800-284-4357 orIn Canada: 1-877-BROTHER. (See Brother

num b e rs on page i.)

15 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to

Authorized Service Personnel under the following conditions:

■ When the power cord is damaged or frayed.

■ If liquid has been spilled into the product.

■ If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

■ If the product does not operate normally when the operating

instructions are followed. Adjust only those controls that are

covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment

of other controls may result in damage and will often require

extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the

product to normal operation.

■ If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been

damaged.

■ If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance,

indicating a need for service.

16 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend

the use of a power protection device (Surge Protector).

17 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons,

note the following:

■ Do not use this product near appliances that use water, a

swimming pool or in a wet basement.

■ Do not use the MFC’s telephone during an electrical storm

(there is the remote possibility of an electrical shock) or to

report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

■ Use only the power cord indicated in this manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 21 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trademarks

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International

Corporation.

Windows, Microsoft and Windows NT are registered trademarks of

Microsoft in the U.S. and other countries.

Macintosh, QuickDraw, iMac and iBook are trademarksorregistered

trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Postscript and Postscript Level 3 are registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

PaperPort and TextBridge are registered trademarks of ScanSoft, Inc.

Presto! PageManager is a registered trademark of NewSoft

Technology Corporation.

Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has

a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.

All other brand and product names mentioned in this User’s

Guide are registered trademarks of their respective companies.

21 - 8 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting androutine

maintenance

Troubleshooting

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the

MFC. Calls must be made from within that country.

Error messages

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur. If this

happens, your MFC identifies the problem and displays an error

message. The most common error messages are shown below.

You can correct most problems by yourself. If you need additional

help, call the Brother fax back system (USA only).

In USA only: 1-800-521-2846

ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR

CAUSE

ACTION

MESSAGE

Change Drum

Soon

The drum unit is near theend of its life.

Use the drum unit until you havea

print quality problem; then replace

thedrum unit with a new one.

The drum counter was not reset.

1. Open thefront cover, and then

press Clear/Back.

2. Press 1 to reset.

Check

Original

The originals were notinserted or fed

properly, or original scanned from ADF was

longer than about 36 inches (90cm).

Se e Or i g i n al j a ms on pag e 2 2-4.

Check Paper

Check Paper #1

Check Paper #2

The MFC is out of paper or paper is not

properly loaded in the paper tray.

Refill thepaper in the paper tray or

MP tray.

—OR—

Remove thepaper andload itagain.

Check Paper MP Paper in theMP tray runs out.

Reload paper. (See T o l o a d p a p er or

other media inthe multi-purpose

tray (MP tray) (For MFC -8 8 2 0D and

MFC -8 8 2 0DN) o n p age 2-8.)

Check Paper

Size

Whenyouseethis error, thepaper in the paper Load theappropriate size paper or

tray does not matchthe paper size you set in change the default setting. (See

Menu, 1, 3.

Sett i n g the M o de Timer o n p age

4-5.)

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERROR MESSAGES

ERR OR

CAUSE

ACTION

MESSAGE

Check Scan

Lock

The scanner lock is locked.

Release thescanner lock lever,and

then press Stop/Exit.

Comm. Error

Poor phone line quality caused

communication error.

Try the call again. Ifproblem

continues, call TelephoneCompany

to check your phoneline.

Connection

Fail

You tried to poll afax machine that is not in

PolledWaiting mode.

Verify theother party’s polling setup.

Cooling Down

Wait For A

While

The temperature of the drum unit or toner

cartridge is too hot. TheMFC will pause its

current print job and go in

You must wait 20 minutes for it to

cool.

to cooling down mode. During the cooling

down mode, youwill hear the cooling fan

runningwhile the display on the MFC shows

CoolingDown, and

Wait For A While.

Cover Open

PLS Close

Cover

The front cover was not completely closed.

Closethe front cover for the drum

uni t.

Disconnected

The other party or other party’s fax machine

terminated the call.

Try totransmit or receive again.

Set the duplex lever to the correct

DX Lever

Error

The paper adjustment lever for duplex

printing is not correctly set for the paper size. position.(S e e To use A u tomat i c

Duplexing for fax, copy and print

o p er a t ions (F or MFC-8820 D a nd

M F C -8820DN) on p a ge 2-1 0.)

Face Up Open

Fuser Open

The face-upoutput tray is open.

The fuser cover is open.

Pleaseclosetheface-upoutputtray.

Please close the jam clear cover.

(S e e P a per j a ms o n p age 2 2 -6.)

MachineError

MFC has a mechanical problem.

Call Brother Customer Service and

tell them theMachine Error number.

In USA:

1-800-284-4329

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER

In Montreal: (514) 685-6464

22 - 2 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR

CAUSE

ACTION

MESSAGE

Out Of Memory You can’t storedata in the memory.

(Fax sending in process)

PressStop and waituntil the other

operations in progress finish and

then try again.

—OR—

Clear the data inthe memory. (S e e

Ou t o f Memory messag e o n p age

10-5.)

(Copy operation in process)

PressStop and waituntil the other

operations in process finish and

then try again.

—OR—

Clear the data inthe memory. (S e e

Ou t o f Memory messag e o n p age

10-5.)

—OR—

Add an optional memory. (See

Memory board on pag e 2 3-1.)

(Printing operation in process)

Reduce print resolution. (Se e P r i n t

Qu a l i t y on p a ge 12-5.)

—OR—

Clear the data inthe memory. (S e e

Ou t o f Memory messag e o n p age

10-5.)

—OR—

Add an optional memory. (See

Memory board on pag e 2 3-1.)

The number you dialeddoes notanswer or is Verify the number and try again.

Response/Busy busy.

Not

Registered

You tried toaccess a One-Touch or

Speed-Dial number that is not programmed.

SetuptheOne-TouchorSpeed-Dial

number. (Se e Storing One-Touch

Dial numbers on page 7 -1 a nd

Stori n g S pee d -D ial nu m b ers on

page 7-2.)

Pls Open

Cover

A page,pieceof paper or paper clip, etc.may Open thefront cover. Ifyouseeany

be jammed inside the MFC.

jammed paper or other item, gently

pull it out, thenclose thefront cover.

If the error message remains,open

and close the front cover again.

If the MFC cannot reset itselfand

returntothedateand timeprompt,it

will display Machine Error XX.

Please call Brother Customer

Serviceand tell them the Machine

Error number:

In USA:

1-800-284-4329

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER

In Montreal: (514) 685-6464

No DX Tray

You triedto make duplex printing with duplex Install theduplex tray correctly.(S e e

cover open.

Paper is jammed in the duplex tray

(F or MFC-8820 D a nd

MFC -8 8 2 0DN) o n p age 22-11.)

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERROR MESSAGES

ERR OR

CAUSE

ACTION

MESSAGE

Paper Jam

The paper is jammed in the MFC.

S e e P a p er jams on pag e 2 2-6 or

Paper is jammed in the duplex tray

(For MFC -88 2 0 D and

M F C -8820DN) on p a ge 22-11.

Toner Empty

Toner cartridgeis not installed.

Reinstall the toner cartridge.

—OR—

Toner is usedup and printing is not possible. Replace the toner cartridge with a

new one. (Se e R e p la c i ng t h e toner

cart r i d ge o n p age 22-28.)

Toner Low

If the LCD shows Toner Low, you can still

print.

Order a new toner cartridge now.

But the toner is depleted andthe MFC is

telling you that the toner will soonrunout.

Original jams

Based upon where the original is jammed, follow the appropriate set

of instructions to remove it.

Original is jammed in the top of the ADF unit.

Take out any paper from

the ADF that is not

jammed.

Lift the ADF cover.

Pull the jammed original

out to the right.

Close the ADF cover.

Press Stop/Exit.

22 - 4 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Original is jammed inside the ADF unit.

Take out anypaper from

the ADF that is not

jammed.

Lift the document cover.

Pull the jammed original

out to the right.

Close the document

cover.

Press Stop/Exit.

—OR—

Take the ADF support out of the ADF unit.

Pull the jammed original out to the right.

Press Stop/Exit.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper jams

To clear paper jams, please follow the steps in this section.

WARNING

After you have just used the MFC, some parts inside the MFC are

extremely hot. When you open the front cover or back output tray of

the MFC, never touch the shaded parts shown in the following

diagram.

HOT!

Front view

Back view

Clear the jammed paper as follows.

If the jammed paper is removed completely by using the information

in the following steps, you can install the paper tray first, and then

close the front cover and the MFC will resume printing automatically.

■ If a paper jam occurs when using the optionallower tray unit,

check for correct installation of the upper paper tray.

■ Always remove all paper from the paper tray and straighten

the stack when you add new paper. This helps prevent

multiple sheets of paper from feeding through the MFC at

one time and reduces paper jams.

22 - 6 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pull the paper tray completely out of the MFC.

Pull the jammed paper up and out of the MFC.

Press the cover release button and then open the front cover.

Pull out the drum unit assembly. Pull the jammed paper up and

out of the MFC. If you cannot remove the drum unit assembly

easily at this time, do not use extra force. Instead, pull the edge

of the jammed paper from the paper tray.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

To prevent damage to the MFC caused by static electricity, do not

touch the electrodes shown in the following diagram.

Open the back output tray. Pull the jammed paper out of the

fuser unit. If the paper jam can be cleared, go to Step 7.

If you have to pull the paper toward the back of the MFC, the

fuser may get dirty with toner powder and it may scatter on the

next printouts. Print a few copies of the test page until the

scattering of toner stops.

22 - 8 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

After you have just used the MFC, some internal parts of the MFC

are extremely HOT!Wait for the MFC to cool down before you touch

the internal parts of the MFC.

HOT!

Back view

Open the jam clear cover (fuser cover). Pull the jammed paper

out of the fuser unit.

Jam Clear Cover

(Fuser Cover)

Close the jam clear cover. Close the back output tray.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Push the lock lever down and take the toner cartridge out of the

drum unit assembly. Take out the jammed paper if there is any

inside the drum unit.

Put the drum unit assembly back in the MFC.

10 Put the paper tray in the MFC.

11 Close the front cover.

22 - 10 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper is jammed in the duplex tray (For MFC-8820D and

MFC-8820DN)

Pull the duplex tray and paper tray out of the MFC.

Pull the jammed paper out of the MFC.

Put the duplex tray and paper tray back into the MFC.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ The Jam Duplexmessage appears if you remove a sheet

of paper from the Face Down Output Tray after only one side

has printed.

■ If the Paper Adjustment Lever for Duplex Printing is not set

correctly for the paper size, paper jams may occur and the

printing will be out of position on the page. (See To use

Automatic Duplexing for fax, copy and print operations (For

M F C-8820D and MFC-8820DN) on page 2-1 0.)

22 - 12 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you are having difficulty with your MFC

If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a

copy first. If the copy looks good, the problem is probably not your

MFC. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.

DIFFICULTY

SUGGESTIONS

Printing or Receiving Faxes

Condensed print and

horizontal streaks or the top

and bottom of sentences are

cut off.

If your copy looks good, youprobably had abadconnection,withstatic or

interferenceonthetelephoneline.Ifthecopy looks bad, cleanthescanner

area. If thereis still problem,call Brother Customer Serviceat

1-800-284-4329 (in USA), 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada) or (514)

685-6464 (in Montreal).

Poor quality print.

Se e Improvin g t he print q u a l i ty on p a ge 22-18.

Vertical black lines when

receiving.

Sometimes you may see vertical streaks/black lines on thefaxes you

receive.Your MFC’s primary corona wirefor printingmay bedirty,or the

sending party’s fax scanner may bedirty.Clean your primary corona

w ire (See Cl e a nin g t he drum unit on pag e 2 2-27 ),or ask the sender to

make acopy to see ifthe problem is with the sending machine. Try

receivingfrom another fax machine. If the problem continues, call

Brother Customer Service at

1-800-284-4329 (In USA), 1-877-BROTHER (In Canada) or

(514) 685-6464 (In Montreal).

Horizontal streaks; lines are

missing.

You may get a fax withhorizontal streaks or with missinglines. Usually

this is caused by a poor telephoneconnection. Ask theother party to

send the fax again.

Receivedfaxes appear as split If the received datais divided and printed ontwo pages or if you get an

or blank pages.

additional blank page, your Paper Sizesettingmaynot becorrect for the

paper you are using (S e e T y p e a nd siz e o f paper on p a g e 2-1).Make

sure that auto reduction function setting is turned on. (S e e P r inting a

red u c ed i n c o m ing f a x (A ut o R e d uct i o n) on pag e 5 -5.)

Phone Line or Connections

Dialing does notwork

Check for a dial tone.ChangeTone/Pulsesetting. (S e e Sett i n g Tone

and Pu l s e d ia l i n g m ode (For Canada only)o n p age 4-4.) Check all line

cord connections.Check power cordconnection. Send amanual faxby

pressingHook,or byliftingtheexternal handset and dialingthenumber.

Waitto hear fax receiving tones before pressingStart.

TheMFC does not answer

when called.

MakesuretheMFC is inthe correctreceiving mode foryour setup.(S ee

Bas i c sending operations o n p age 6-6.) Check for a dial tone. If

possible, call your MFC to hear it answer. Ifthere is still no answer,

check thetelephoneline cord connection. Ifthereis noringingwhen you

call your MFC,ask your telephonecompany to check theline.

Sending Faxes

Poor sending quality.

Try changingyour resolutiontoFine orS.Fine.Makea copy tocheck

your MFC’s scanner operation. If copy quality is not good, cleanthe

scanner. (S e e Cl e a nin g t he s c anner on p a g e 22-25.)

Transmission Verification

Report says ‘RESULT:NG’ or

‘RESULT:ERROR’.

There is probably temporary noise or static onthe line. Try sending the

fax again.If you send aPC FAX messageand get ‘RESULT:NG’ or, on

the Transmission VerificationReport, your MFC may be outofmemory.

To gain extra memory, you can turn offFax Storage(S e e Sett i n g Fax

Storag e on p a g e 8-3),print fax messages inmemory (S e e Po l l i n g on

page 5-9) or cancel a DelayedFax or Polling Job (Se e C a n ce l i n g a j ob

w h i l e s c anning t h e o riginal on p a ge 6-1 1). Iftheproblem continues, ask

the telephone company to check your phone line.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIFFICULTY

SUGGESTIONS

Vertical black lines when

sending.

If the copy you made shows the same problem, your scanner is dirty.

(Se e Cleaning the sca n n er on page 2 2 -25.)

Handling Incoming Calls

MFC ‘Hears’ Voice as CNG

Tone.

If your MFC is set to Easy ReceiveON, it is more sensitive to sounds.

Your MFC may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line

as a calling fax machineand respond withfax receiving tones.

Deactivate thefax by pressing Stop/Exit.Try avoidingthis problem by

turning Easy Receiveto OFF.(S e e Ea s y Recei v e o n p age 5-4.)

Sendinga Fax Call to the

MFC.

If you answered at the MFC, press St art and hang up immediately.If

you answered on an external or extensionphone, press your Fax

Receive Code (default settingis ( 51). Whenyour MFC answers,

hang up.

Custom features on a single

line.

If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID,Caller ID,RingMaster,

Voice Mail, an answeringmachine, analarm system or other custom

feature on a single phone linewith your MFC, it may create a problem

sending or receiving fax data.

For Example: Your Brother MFC handles the Caller ID subscriber

services. However, if yousubscribe to Call Waiting or someother

custom service andits signal comes through theline while your MFC is

sending or receivingafax,the signal cantemporarily interruptor disrupt

thefaxdata. Brother’s ECMfeatureshouldhelpovercomethis problem.

This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is

common to all devices thatsend and receive information on a single,

shared line with custom features. If avoiding aslight interruption is

crucial to your business, a separate linewith no custom features is

recommended.

Menu Setting Difficulties

The MFC beeps whenyou try Make surethat MFC is inFax mode. If the Fax

key is not

to access the Setup Receive

andSetup Send menus.

illuminated, press it toturn onFax mode.SetupReceivesetting(Menu,

2, 1) andSetup Send setting(Men u, 2, 2) are available only when the

MFC is in F ax mode.

Copy Quality Difficulties

Vertical streaks appear in

copies.

Sometimes you may see vertical streaks on your copies. Either the

scanner or theprimary coronawirefor printingis dirty. Cleanthem both.

(Se e Cleaning the sca n n er on page 2 2 -25 a nd Cle a n ing t h e d rum unit

on p a ge 22-27.)

22 - 14 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIFFICULTY

SUGGESTIONS

Printer Difficulties

TheMFC does not print.

Check the following:

• The MFC is pluggedin andthe power switchturned On. (See the

Quick Setup Guide on page7.)

• The toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See

Re p l a c i ng t h e d rum unit on page 2 2 -3 4.)

• The interface cable is securely connected betweenthe MFC and

computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)

• Check to see if LCD is showing an error message. (Se e E r r or

m e s s ages on page 2 2 -1.)

TheMFC prints unexpectedly Reset theMFC or turn it off and then on again. Check the primary

or it prints garbage.

settings inyour application softwareto makesureitis setuptoworkwith

your MFC.

TheMFC prints first couple of Your computer is not recognizing the printer’s input buffer full signal.

pages correctly, then some

pages have text missing.

Please make sureto connect the MFC cable correctly.

TheMFC cannotprint full

pages of a document.

Out Of Memorymessage

occurs.

Reduce the printing resolution. Reduce the complexity of your

document and try again.Reducethe graphic quality or the number of

font sizes within your application software.

My headers or footers appear Most laser printers have a restricted areathat will not accept print.

when I view my document on

the screen but donot appear

when I print them.

Usually thesearethe first two lines and last two lines, leaves 62

printable lines.Adjust the top and bottom margins in your documentto

allow for this.

Scanning Difficulties

TWAIN errors appear while

scanning.

Makesure theBrother TWAIN driver is selected as the primary source.

In PaperPort , click Scan in the File menu and select the Brother

TWAIN driver.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIFFICULTY

SUGGESTIONS

Software Difficulties

Cannot perform‘2in1 or4in1’ Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer

printing.

driver are the same.

Cannot print whenusing

Adobe Illustrator.

Try to reduce the print resolution.

When using ATM fonts, some Ifyou areusingWindows^®95/98/98SE/Me,select ‘Printer Settings’ from

characters aremissing or the‘Start’ menu. Select the properties ofthe ‘Brother MFC-8420or

somecharacters areprintedin MFC-8820D (USB) Printer’. Click ‘Spool Setting’ on the ‘Details’ tab.

their place.

Select ‘RAW’ from ‘Spool Data Format.’

“Unable to write toLPT1” or

“LPT1 already in use” Error

Message appears.

1.Make surethe MFC is on (plugged into the AC power outlet and

turned the power switch on) and that it is connecteddirectly tothe

computer using the bundled IEEE-1284 bi-directional parallel cable.

The cable must not go through another peripheral device(suchas a

Zip Drive, External CD-ROM Drive, or Switch box).

2.Make surethe MFC is not displaying an error message on the LCD

Display.

“MFC is Busy” Error Message

appears.

3.Make sureno other device drivers,which also communicate through

the parallel port, are running automatically when you boot up the

computer (such as, drivers for Zip Drives, External CD-ROM Drive,

etc.) Suggested areas to check: (Load=, Run=commandlines in the

win.ini file or the Setup Group)

4.Check withyoucomputer manufacturerto confirmthatthecomputer’s

parallel port settings in theBIOS are set to support a bi-directional

machine; i.e.(Parallel Port Mode – ECP)

'MFC Connect Failure'

IftheMFC is not connectedto your PC andyouhave loadedtheBrother

software, thePC will show 'MFCConnect Failure' eachtimeyou restart

Windows^®.Youcan ignorethis message or youcan turnitoffas follows.

Double-click "\tool\WarnOFF.REG" from the supplied CD-ROM.

TheScankey ontheMFC's control panel will notwork unless yourestart

your PC withthe MFC connected. Toturn it back on, Double-click

"\tool\WarnON.REG" from the supplied CD-ROM.

Paper Handling Difficulties

TheMFC does not load paper. Check to see if the Check Paperor Paper Jammessageappears on

The LCD shows Check

Paperor Paper Jam.

the LCD. If it is empty, load anew stack of paper into the paper tray. If

there is paper in the paper tray, make sureit is straight. Ifthe paper is

curled, you shouldstraighten it.Sometimes it is helpful to removethe

paper,turn the stack overand put it back intothe paper tray.Reducethe

amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again. Check that the

manual feed mode or MP tray or MP modeis not selectedin the printer

driver.

The MFCdoes not feedpaper Reinsert thepaper firmly, load one sheet at a time. Make sure that

from themanual feed tray.

manual feed mode or MP mode is selected in the printer driver.

How can I load envelopes?

You canload envelopes from the manual feed or MP tray.Your

application software must be set up to print the envelope size you are

using.This is usually doneinthePageSetupor Document Setupmenu

of your software.Refer to your software applicationmanual.

What paper can I use?

You can use plainpaper, envelopes, transparencies and labels that are

made for laser machines. (For informationon paper you canuse, see

P r i n ter operatio n k e ys o n p age 11-16.)

How can I clear paper jams?

S e e P a per j a ms on page 2 2 -6.

22 - 16 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIFFICULTY

SUGGESTIONS

Print Quality Difficulties

Printed pages are curled.

Thin or thick paper below the standard can cause this problem. Make

sure you select thePaper Type thatsuits the media type you use. (See

Sett i n g the P a p er T y p e on p a g e 4-5 and M e d ia Type on pag e 1 2-4.)

Printed pages are smeared.

ThePaper Type setting may beincorrect for the type ofprint mediayou

are using—OR—The print media may be too thick or have a rough

surface. (S e e Se t t ing th e P aper Type on page 4 -5 a n d Med i a T y p e on

page 12-4.)

Printouts are too light.

SetToner Save modeto offintheAdvance tabin theprinter driver.(See

Ton e r S a v e o n p age 12-6.)

Network Difficulties

I cannot print over the Network Make sure that your MFC is powered on and is On Line and in Ready

mode.Press theTestswitch. Thenthe current settings of theNC-9100h

areprinted.Verify thatthe cablingand Network connections are good. If

possible, try connecting theMFC to adifferentport on your hubusing a

differentcable. Check to see if thereis any LED activity. The NC-9100h

has a twocolor LED for diagnosing problems.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Improving the print quality

This section provides information on the following topics:

Examplesof poor print

quality

Recommendation

Check the printer’s environment. Conditions such as humidity, high

temperatures, andso on may cause this print fault. (See Choos i n g a

l o cat i o n on p a ge ix.)

If the wholepage is too light, Toner Save modemay be on. Turn off

Toner Save mode in the printer Properties tab of the driver.

—OR —

If your MFC is not connected to a computer, turnoff Toner Save mode

in the MFC itself. (S e e Toner Save on p a g e 4-9.)

Try installing a new toner cartridge. (S e e Replacing the t o n er cartridge

on p a ge 22-28.)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Faint

Try installing a new drum unit. (S e e Repla c i n g t he drum unit on pa g e

22-34.)

Make surethat you usepaper that meets therecommended

specifications. (See About p a per on page 2 -1.)

Check the printer’s environment - high temperatures and high humidity

can increasethe amount of background shading. (Se e Ch o o s i n g a

l o cat i o n on p a ge ix.)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Use a new toner cartridge.(S e e Replacing the t o n er cartridg e o n p age

22-28.)

Gray background

Use a new drum unit. (Se e R e p la c i n g t he drum unit on pag e 2 2-3 4.)

Makesureyouusepaper that meets ourspecifications. Rough-surfaced

paper or thick print media may causethis problem.

Make surethat you choose the appropriate media type in the printer

driver. (Se e A b o ut paper on p a ge 2-1.)

Try usinga new drum unit. (Se e Replacing th e d rum unit o n p age

22-34.)

Gho st

Make surethat you usepaper that meets our specifications.

Rough-surfacedpaper may cause the problem. (Se e A b out p a p er o n

pa g e 2 -1.)

Thedrum unitmay bedamaged. Put ina new drumunit.(Se e Replacing

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Toner specks

Hollow print

All black

Makesure that you usepaper that meets our specifications. (S e e A b out

pa p e r o n p age 2-1.)

Choose Thick paper modein theprinter driver, or use thinner paper

thanyou are currently using.

Check the printer’s environmentbecause conditions such as high

humidity can cause hollow print. (Se e C h o os i n g a l o cat i o n on p a ge ix.)

You may clear the problem by cleaning the primary corona wire inside

thedrum unit by sliding the blue tab. Make sureyoureturnthe blue tab

to the home position (▲). (See Cle a n ing t h e drum unit on pag e 2 2-2 7.)

Thedrum unitmay bedamaged. Put ina new drumunit.(Se e Replacing

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

22 - 18 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples of poor print

quality

R ecommendation

If theproblem is not solvedafter printingafew pages,thedrumunit may

have glue from label stock on the OPC drum surface.

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

Clean thedrum unitas follows:

1 Position theprint sample infront of the drum unit,and find the exact

position of thepoor print.

White Spots on black text

and graphics at 94 mm

(3.7 in.) intervals

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

Black Spots at 94 mm

(3.7 in.) intervals

2 Turn the drum unit gear by hand while looking atthe surface of the

OPC drum.

Do nottouch the photosensitive drum with your fingers.

Photosensitive drum

3 When you have locatedthe mark on the drum thatmatches the print

sample,wipe thesurface of the OPC drum with a cotton swab until

the dust or paper powder onthe surface comes off.

Do nottry to clean the surface of the photosensitivedrum with a

sharp object, such as a ball-point pen, andso on.

Thedrumunitmay be damaged.Putinanew drumunit.(S e e Replacing

the drum unit on pag e 2 2-3 4.)

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examplesof poor print

quality

Recommendation

Thedrum unitmay bedamaged. Put ina new drumunit.(Se e Replacing

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

Makesure that you usepaper that meets our specifications. (S e e A b out

pa p e r o n p age 2-1.)

If you use label sheets for laser printers, the gluefrom the sheets may

sometimes stick to the OPC drum surface. Clean thedrum unit. (S e e

Cleanin g t he drum unit on pa g e 2 2-27.)

Donot use paper that has clips or staples because they will scratchthe

surface ofthe drum.

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Black toner marks across

the page

Ifthe unpacked drum unitis in direct sunlight or room light,the unit may

be damaged.

Make surethat you usepaper that meets our specifications. A rough

surfaced paper or thick print mediacan cause the problem.

Make surethat you select the appropriatemedia typein theprinter

driver.

Theproblem may disappear by itself.Try printingmultiplepages toclear

this problem, especially if theprinter has not beenusedfor alongtime.

Thedrum unitmay bedamaged. Put ina new drumunit.(Se e Replacing

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

White lines across the page

Clean the inside of the printer and the primary corona wire in the drum

unit. (Se e Cleaning the drum u n i t on p a g e 22-27.)

Thedrum unitmay bedamaged. Put ina new drumunit.(Se e Replacing

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Lines across the page

Clean the primary corona wire of thedrum unit.

Make sure theprimary coronawire cleaner is at thehomeposition(▲).

Thedrumunitmay bedamaged.Install anewdrumunit.(Se e Repl a c i n g

th e d ru m u nit o n p age 22-34.)

Thetoner cartridgemay bedamaged. Put in anewtoner cartridge.(S e e

Replacing th e t oner cartridg e on page 2 2 -28 .) Make sure that a torn

pieceof paper is not inside the printer covering the scanner window.

The fixing unit may be smudged. Call Customer Service.

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

A B C D

abcde

0 1 2 3 4

Black lines down the page

Printed pages have toner

stains down the page.

You may clear the problem by wipingthe scanner window witha soft

cloth.(S e e Clea n i ng th e p r i n ter on pa g e 2 2-26.)

Thetoner cartridgemay bedamaged. Put in anewtoner cartridge.(S e e

Replacing th e t oner cartridg e on page 2 2 -28 .)

ABCDEFGH

abcdefghijk

ABCD

abcde

01234

White lines down the page

Makesure the paper or otherprint mediais loadedproperly inthepaper

tray and thatthe guides arenot too tight or tooloose against the paper

stack.

Set the paper guides correctly.

If you are using the manual feed tray (or the multi-purpose tray).(S e e

How to load p a p er on page 2-5.)

^hD

^eC

^bB

Pageskewed

The paper tray may be too full.

Check the paper type and quality. (Se e A b out pa p e r o n p age 2-1.)

Check the paper type andquality. High temperatures andhigh humidity

will cause paper to curl.

If you don’t use the printer very often, the paper may have been in the

paper tray too long. Turn over thestack of paper inthe paper tray.Also,

try fanningthe paper stack andthenrotating thepaper 180° inthepaper

tray.

Try printing usingthe straight-through output path. (Se e How to lo a d

pa p e r o n p age 2-5.)

Curl or wave

22 - 20 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples of poor print

quality

R ecommendation

Make sure that paper is loadedproperly.

Check the paper type andquality. (S e e Abou t p aper on pag e 2 -1.)

Try printingusing the straight-through output path.(S e e How to load

paper on page 2 -5.)

Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or try rotatingthe paper 180° in

the input tray.

DEFGH

abc efghijk

bcde

C D

3 4

Wrinkles or creases

The drum unit is a consumable item and it is necessary to

replace it periodically.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Packing and shipping the MFC

Whenever you transport the MFC, use the packing materials that

came with your machine. If you do not pack the MFC correctly, you

may void your warranty.

Turn the MFC power switch off.

Unplug the MFC from the telephone wall jack.

Unplug the MFC from the AC outlet.

Lock the Scanner Lock

Push the Scanner Lock Lever down to lock the scanner. This

lever is located on the left of the scanner glass.

Scanner Lock Lever

Caution

Damage caused to your MFC by failure to lock the scanner

before moving and shipping may void your warranty.

Open the front cover.

22 - 22 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remove the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly. Leave the

toner cartridge installed in the drum unit.

Place the drum unit and toner

cartridge assembly into the plastic bag

and seal the bag.

Close the front cover. Fold down the face-down output tray flap.

Remove the telephone line cord.

Wrap the MFC in the plastic bag

and place it in the original carton

with the original packing material.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10 Pack the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly, telephone line

cord, AC cord and printed materials in the original carton as

shown below:

If you are returning the MFC to Brother as part of the Exchange

Service, pack onlythe MFC. Keep all separate parts to use with

your ‘Exchange’ machine.

11 Close the carton and tape it shut.

22 - 24 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Routine maintenance

Cleaning the scanner

Turn the MFC power switch off and lift the document cover. Clean the

scanner glass and glass strip with dry cloth and the white film with

isopropyl alcohol on a lint free cloth.

White Film

Glass strip

Document Cover

White film

If the screen still displays a scanner error, call Brother Customer

Service for assistance at 1-800-284-4329 (in USA),

1-877-BROTHER (in Canada), or (514) 685-6464 (in Montreal).

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning the printer

Caution

■ Do not use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control

panel. It may crack the panel.

■ Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the laser scanner window.

■ Do not touch the scanner window with your finger.

■ The drum unit contains toner, so handle it carefully. If toner

scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty, immediately wipe or

wash it off with cold water.

Turn the MFC power switch off and open the front cover.

Remove the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly.

WARNING

Just after you have used the MFC, some internal parts of the

machine are extremely HOT! When you open the front cover of the

MFC, never touch the shaded parts shown in the diagram below.

HOT!

Front view

Gently clean the scanner window by wiping it with a clean soft

dry cloth. Do not use isoproply alcohol.

Laser Scanner

Window

22 - 26 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cleaning the drum unit

We recommend placing the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly

on a cloth or large disposable paper to avoid spilling and scattering

toner.

Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently

sliding the blue tab from right to left several times.

Return the blue tab and snap it into the Home position (▼).

Tab

Home Position(▼)

Corona Wire

Caution

If the blue tab is not at Home position (▼), printed pages may have

vertical stripes.

Reinstall the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly into the

MFC.

(See Replacing the drum unit on page 22-34.)

Close the front cover.

Plug in the power cord first, then the telephone cord.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replacing the toner cartridge

The MFC can print up to 6,500 pages using a high yield toner

cartridge. When the toner cartridge is running low, the LCD shows

Toner Low. The MFC is supplied with a standard toner cartridge

that must be replaced after approximately 3,300 pages. Actual page

count will vary depending on your average type of original (i.e.,

standard letter, detailed graphics).

It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use

when you see the Toner Lowwarning.

Discard the used toner cartridge according to local regulations,

keeping it separate from domestic waste. Be sure to seal the toner

cartridge tightly so toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge. If

you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

We recommend that you clean the MFC when you replace the toner

cartridge.

22 - 28 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to replace the toner cartridge

WARNING

Just after you use the MFC, some internal parts of the machine will

be extremely HOT! So, never touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustration.

HOT!

Open the front cover and pull out the drum unit.

Caution

■ Place the drum unit on a drop cloth or large piece of disposable

paper to avoid spilling and scattering the toner.

■ To prevent damage to the MFC from static electricity, do not

touch the electrodes shown below.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hold down the lock lever on the right and pull the toner cartridge

out of the drum unit.

Lock Lever

Caution

Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands

or clothes, immediately wipe it off or wash it with cold water.

22 - 30 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Unpack the new toner cartridge. Place the used toner cartridge

into the aluminum bag and discard it according to local

regulations.

Caution

■ Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you

install it in the MFC. If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long

period of time, the toner life is shortened.

■ Brother strongly recommends that you do not refill the toner

cartridge provided with your MFC. We also strongly recommend

that you continue to use only Genuine Brother Brand

replacement toner cartridges (TN-530 or TN-560). Using or

attempting to use potentially incompatible toner and/or toner

cartridges in your MFC may cause damage to the machine itself

and/or it may result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our warranty

coverage does not apply to any problem that was caused by the

use of unauthorized third party toner and toner cartridges. To

protect your investment and guarantee your print quality please

continue to replace consumed toner cartridgeswith only Genuine

Brother Branded Supplies.

Gently rock the toner cartridge from side to side five or six times

to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remove the protective cover.

Insert the new toner cartridge in the drum unit until it clicks into

place. If you put it in properly, the lock lever will lift automatically.

Drum Unit

Toner Cartridge

Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently

sliding the blue tab from right to left several times. Return the

blue tab to the Home position (▼) before reinstalling the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly.

Tab

Home Position(▼)

Corona Wire

22 - 32 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reinstall the drum unit and toner cartridge assembly and close

the front cover.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replacing the drum unit

The MFC uses a drum unit to create print images on paper. If the

LCD shows Change Drum Soon, the drum unit is near the end of

its life and it is time to purchase a new one.

Even if the LCD shows Change Drum Soon, you may be able to

continue printing without having to replace the drum unit for a while.

However, if there is a noticeable deterioration in the output print

quality (even before Change Drum Soonappears), then the drum

unit should be replaced. You should clean the MFC when you

replace the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 22-27.)

Caution

When removing the drum unit, handle it carefully because it contains

toner. If toner scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty,

immediately wipe or wash with cold water.

The drum unit is a consumable item, and it is necessary to

replace it periodically. There are many factors that determine

the actual drum life, such as temperature, humidity, type of

paper and how much toner you use for the number of pages per

print job. The estimated drum life is up to 20,000 pages. The

actual number of pages your drum will print may be significantly

less than these estimates. Because we have no control over the

many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot

guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by

your drum.

WARNING

Just after you have used the MFC, some internal parts of the MFC

are extremely HOT! So please be careful.

HOT!

22 - 34 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Follow these steps to replace the drum unit:

Press the cover release button and then open the front cover.

Remove the old drum unit and toner cartridge assembly. Place

it on a drop cloth or disposable paper to avoid scattering toner.

Caution

To prevent damage to the printer from static electricity, do not touch

the electrodes shown below.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hold down the lock lever on the right and pull the toner cartridge

out of the drum unit. (See Replacing the toner cartridge on page

22 -28.)

Lock Lever

Discard the used drum unit according to local regulations,

keeping it separate from domestic waste. Be sure to seal the

drum unit tightly so toner powder does not spill out of the unit. If

you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

Wait to unpack the new drum unit until immediately before

installing it. Place the old drum unit into the plastic bag and

discard it according to local regulations.

Reinstall the toner cartridge into the new drum unit. (See

Replacing the toner cartridge on page 22-28.)

Reinstall the new drum unit, keeping the front cover open.

Press Clear/Back.

Press 1 and when the LCD shows

Replace Drum

Accepted, and close the front

▲ 1.Yes

▼ 2.No

cover.

Select ▲▼ & Set

Caution

If toner scatters and your hands or clothes get dirty, immediately

wipe off or wash with cold water.

22 - 36 TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checking the drum life

You can see the percentage of the drum’s life that remains available.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.

20.Miscellaneous

2.Drum Life

For five seconds, the LCD shows

the available percentage of drum

life.

Remaining:100%

Even if the remaining drum life is 0%, you may continue to use

the drum unit until you have a print quality problem.

Page Counter

You can see number of total pages, copy pages, print pages and

List/Fax (total fax print + total list print) pages that your MFC has

printed.

Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.

The LCD shows number of pages

for Totaland Copy.

20.Miscellaneous

3.Page Counter

▲ Total :123456

▼ Copy

:120002

Press

to see Printand

List/Fax.

Press Stop/Exit.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 22 - 37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Optional accessories

Memory board

The memoryboard is installed on the main controller board inside the

MFC. When you add the optional memory board, it increases the

performance for both copier and printer operations.

Model Name

Optional Memory

MFC-8420 (32 MB Standard Memory)

32MB TECHWORKS 12457-0001

MFC-8820D (32 MB Standard Memory) 64MB TECHWORKS 12458-0001

MFC-8820DN (32 MB Standard Memory) 128MB TECHWORKS 12459-0001

In general, the DIMM must have the following specifications:

Type:

100 pin and 32 bit output

2 or 3

CAS Lantency:

Clock Frequency:

Capacity:

100MHz or more

32, 64, 128MB

35mm (1.4 inches) or less

NONE

Height:

Parity:

DRAM Type:

SDRAM 4 Bank

Some DIMMs might not work with this MFC. For the latest

information from Brother visit:

http://solutions.brother.com

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the optional memory board

WARNING

■ DO NOT touch the surface of the main board within 15 minutes

after turning off the power.

■ Before installing the optional memory board, make sure there are

no faxes in the memory.

Disconnect the telephone line cord, turn the MFC power switch

off, unplug the MFC power cord from the AC outlet, and then

disconnect the interface cable.

WARNING

Turn the MFC power switch off, before installing (or removing) the

memory board.

Remove the side cover. Loosen the two screws, and then

remove the metal shield plate.

Unpack the DIMM and hold it by the edges.

23 - 2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

DIMM boards can be damaged by even a small amount of static

electricity. Do not touch the memory chips or the board surface.

Wear an antistatic wrist strap when you install or remove the board.

If you do not have an antistatic wrist strap, frequently touch the bare

metal on the printer.

Hold the DIMM with your fingers on the side edges and your

thumb on the back edge. Line up the notches on the DIMM with

the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM

slot are open or facing outwards.)

Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). Make sure

the locks on each side of the DIMM click into place. (To remove

a DIMM, you must release the locks.)

Put the metal plate back on and secure the metal plate with the

two screws.

Put the side cover back on.

Reconnect the telephone line cord.

Reconnect any additional interface cables that you removed.

10 Reconnect the power cable and then turn on the MFC power

switch.

■ To check that you have installed the DIMM correctly, print

the printer settings by using the selection in the driver and

check the printout to make sure it shows the additional

memory.

■ You can check the current memory size in the user setting

list. (See the NC-9100h Network User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

If the Status LED turns Red for a Service Error, please call Brother

Customer Service at: 1-800-284-4329 (in USA), 1-877-BROTHER

(in Canada) or (514) 685-6464 (in Montreal).

Network (LAN) board

When you add the optional Network (LAN) Board (NC-9100h), you

can connect your MFC into the network to use the Internet FAX,

Network Scanner, Network Printer and Network Management

operations.

WARNING

DO NOT touch the surface of the main board within 15 minutes after

turning off the power.

For more details about how to configure the Network board, please

see the NC-9100h Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM supplied

with the MFC.

NC-9100h

Print/Fax Server

23 - 4 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before starting installation

Be careful when handling the NC-9100h. There are many delicate

electronic components that are susceptible to damage from static

electricity. To avoid such damage, use the following precautions

when handling the board.

■ Leave the NC-9100h in its anti-static bag until you are ready to

install it.

■ Make sure that you are adequatelygrounded before touching the

NC-9100h. Use an anti-static wrist strap and a grounding mat if

possible. If you do not have an anti-static wrist strap, touch the

bare metal surface on the back of the machine before handling

the NC-9100h.

■ Avoid moving around the work area in order to eliminate static

charge build-up.

■ If possible, do not work on a carpeted area.

■ Do not flex the board and do not touch the components on the

card.

Tools Required:

Phillips Screwdriver

Step 1: Hardware installation

WARNING

DO NOTtouch the surface of the main boards within 15 minutes after

turning off the power.

Disconnect the telephone line cord, turn the MFC power switch

off, unplug the MFC power cord from the AC outlet, and then

disconnect the interface cable.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Turn the MFC power switch off, before installing (or removing) the

NC-9100h board.

Remove the side cover. Loosen the two screws, and then

remove the metal shield plate.

Loosen the two screws, and then remove the metal cover plate.

Cover Plate

23 - 6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Plug the NC-9100h into connector P1 located on the main board

as shown in the illustration (press firmly) and secure the

NC-9100h with the two screws.

Put the metal shield plate back on and secure it with the two

screws.

Put the side cover back on.

Reconnect the telephone line cord.

Reconnect any additional interface cables that you removed.

Reconnect the power cable and then turn on the MFC power

switch.

10 Press the Test switch and print a network configuration page.

(See TEST SWITCH on page 23-9.)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 2: Connecting the NC-9100h to an

Unshielded Twisted Pair 10BASE-T or

100BASE-TX Ethernet Network

To connect the NC-9100h to a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX Network,

you must have an Unshielded Twist PairCable. One side of the cable

must be connected to a free port on your Ethernet hub and the other

side must be connected to the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TXconnector

(an RJ45 Connector) of the NC-9100h.

Verifying successful hardware Installation:

Plug in the AC power cord. After initialization and warm-up (this may

take several seconds), the machine will come to a Ready state.

LED

No light:

If both of the two LEDs are off, then the print server is not connected

to the network.

Link/Speed LED is orange: Fast Ethernet

This Link/Speed LED will be orange if the print server is connected

to a 100BASETX Fast Ethernet network.

Link/Speed LED is green: 10 BASE T Ethernet

This Link/Speed LED will be green if the print server is connected to

a 10 BASE T Ethernet.

23 - 8 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Active LED is yellow:

The Active LEDwill blink if the print server is receivingor transmitting data.

If there is a valid connection to the network, the LED will blink

orange or green.

TEST SWITCH

Short push: Prints the network configuration page.

Long push (more than 5 seconds): Reset the network configuration

back to the factory default settings.

Test Switch

LED

Ethernet

RJ-45

LED

To set up the MFC on the Network, see the NC-9100h Network

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.

Paper Tray #2

You can purchase the Paper Tray #2 accessory (LT-5000) to use as a

third paper source. Tray #2 holds up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m )

paper.

Paper Tray #2

Basis Weight

Holds approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m²)

16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m²)

Moisture Content

4% to 6% by weight

We Recommend:

Cut sheet:

Xerox 4200 DP 20 lb

Hammermill Laser Paper 24 lb

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 23 - 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) The original can be placed in

the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.

Auto Dial List A listing of namesand numbers stored in One-Touch

and Speed-Dial memory, in numerical order.

Automatic fax transmission Sending a fax without picking up the

handset of an external phone (or pressing Hook).

Automatic Redial A feature that enables your MFC to redial the last

fax number if the fax did not go through because the line was

busy.

Auto Reduction Reduces the size of incoming faxes.

Batch Transmission As a cost savingsfeature, all delayed faxes to

the same fax number will be sent as one transmission.

Beeper The sound the keys make when they are pressed, an error

occurs, or a fax has been received or sent.

Beeper volume Volume setting for the beep when you press a key

or make an error.

Broadcasting The ability to send the same fax message to more

than one location.

Caller ID A subscriber service purchased from the Telephone

Company that lets you see the number (or name) of the party

calling you. Your MFC stores the latest callers so you can print a

Log and view caller information.

CNG tones The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during

automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that they are

from a fax machine.

Communication error (or Comm. Error) An error during fax

sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.

GLOSSARY G - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coding Method Method of coding the information contained in the

original. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of

Modified Huffman (MH). Your MFC is capable of greater

compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified Modified

Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the receiving machine has the same

capability.

Compatibility Group The ability of one fax unit to communicate

with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.

Contrast Setting to compensate for dark or light originals, by

making faxes or copies of dark originals lighter and light originals

darker.

Cover Page Prints a page at the other party’s fax machine that

contains the sender and recipient’s name and fax number,

number of pages and comment. You can generate an electronic

cover page at the other end with pre-programmed information

from memory or you can print a sample cover page to fax with

your original.

Cover Page Message The comment that is on the Cover Page.

This is a programmable feature.

Delayed Fax Sends your fax at a later time that day.

Distinctive Ring A subscriber service purchased from the

telephone company that provides another phone number on an

existing phone line. The Brother MFC uses the new number to

simulate a dedicated fax line.

Drum Unit A printing device for the MFC.

Dual Access Your MFC can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs

into memory at the same time it is sending a fax or receiving or

printing an incoming fax.

Easy Receive Enables your MFC to respond to CNG tones if you

interrupt a fax call by answering it.

ECM (Error Correction Mode) Detects errors during fax

transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.

G - 2 GLOSSARY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Extension phone A telephone on the fax number that is plugged

into a separate wall jack.

External phone A TAD (telephone answering device) or telephone

that is plugged into the EXT jack of your MFC.

F/T Ring Time The length of time that the Brother MFC rings (when

the Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a

voice call that it answered.

Fax Activity Report Lists information about the last 200 incoming

and outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.

Fax Forwarding Sends a fax received into the memory to another

preprogrammed fax number.

Fax Receive Code Press this code ( 51) when you answer a fax

call from an extension or external phone to transfer the call to the

MFC.

Fax Storage You can print stored faxes later, or retrieve them from

another location using Fax Forwarding, Paging, or Remote

Retrieval operations.

Fax/Tel You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this

mode if you are using a telephone answering device (TAD).

Fax tones The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines

while communicating information.

Fine resolution Resolution is203× 196 dpi. It is used for small print

and graphs.

Gray scale The shades of gray available for copying and faxing

photographs.

Group number A combination of One-Touch, Speed-Dial numbers

that are stored as a Speed-Dial number for Broadcasting.

Help list A printout of the complete Menu that you can use to program

your MFC when you do not have the User’s Guide with you.

Interval The preprogrammed time period between automatically

printed ActivityReports. You can print Activity Reportson demand

without interrupting this cycle.

LCD (liquid crystal display) The display screen on the MFC that

shows interactive messages during On-Screen Programming and

shows the date and time when the MFC is idle.

GLOSSARY G - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual fax When you lift the handset of your external telephone or

press Hook so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer

before you press Start to begin transmission.

Menu mode Programming mode for changing your MFC’s settings.

MFL-Pro Suite Turns your MFC into a printer and a scanner and

enables PC faxing using the MFC.

OCR (optical character recognition) The bundled ScanSoft^®

TextBridge^®software application converts an image of text to text

you can edit.

One-Touch Keys on the MFC control panel where you can store

numbers for easy dialing. You can store a second number on

each key if you press Shift and the One-Touch key together.

Out of Paper Reception Receives faxes into the MFC’s memory

when the machine is out of paper.

Overseas Mode Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to

accommodate noise and static on overseas phone lines.

Paging Thisfeature enablesyour MFC to call your pager when a fax

is received into its memory.

Pause Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in the dialing

sequence stored on Speed-Dial numbers. Press Pauseas many

times as needed for longer pauses.

Photo resolution A resolution setting that uses varying shades of

gray for the best representation of photographs.

Polling The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine

to retrieve waiting fax messages.

Pulse A form of rotary dialing on a telephone line.

Real Time Transmission When memory is full, you can send faxes

in real time.

Remaining jobs You can check which jobs are waiting in memory

and cancel jobs individually.

Remote Retrieval Access The abilityto accessyour MFCremotely

from a touch tone phone.

G - 4 GLOSSARY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Access Code Your own four-digit code that allows you to

call and access your MFC from a remote location.

Resolution The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch.

See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine and Photo.

Ring Delay The number of rings before the MFC answers in FAX

mode.

Ring Volume Volume setting for the MFC’s ring.

Scanning The process of sending an electronic image of a paper

document into your computer.

Search An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored One-Touch,

Speed-Dial and Group numbers.

Speed-Dial A preprogrammed number for easy dialing. You must

press the Search/Speed Dialkey and then #, and the three digit

code to start the dialing process.

Standard resolution 203 x 97 dpi. It is used for regular size text

and quickest transmission.

Station ID The stored information that appears on the top of faxed

pages. It includes the sender’s name and fax number.

Super fine resolution 203 x 391 dpi. Best for very small print and

line art.

TAD (telephone answering device) You can connect an external

TAD to the EXT. jack of the MFC.

Telephone Answer Code (Fax/Tel mode) When the MFC

answers a voice call, it pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at

an extension phone by pressing this code (#51).

Temporary Settings You can select certain options for each fax

transmission and copy without changing the default settings.

Tone A form of dialing on the telephone line used for Touch Tone

telephones.

Toner cartridge An accessory that holds toner for the drum unit on

Brother laser models.

Toner Save A process that causes less toner to be affixed to the

page to extend the life of the toner assembly. This will make the

receiving document significantly lighter.

GLOSSARY G - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transmission The process of sending faxes over the phone lines

from your MFC to the receiving fax machine.

Transmission Verification Report A listing for each transmission,

that shows its date, time and number.

True Type fonts The fontsthat are used in the Windows^®operating

systems. If you install the Brother True Type fonts, more types of

fonts will be available for Windows^®applications.

User Settings A printed report that shows the current settings of

your MFC.

G - 6 GLOSSARY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

Product description

The MFC-8420, MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN are 5 in 1

Multi-Function Centers: Printer, Copier, Color Scanner, Fax, and PC

Fax (via your PC). The MFC-8820D includes Duplex Printing. The

MFC-8820DN includes Duplex Printing and Network capability.

General

Memory Capacity

Optional Memory

Automatic Document

Feeder (ADF)

32 MB

1 DIMM slot; Memory expandable up to 160 MB

Up to 50 pages

Temperature: 68°F - 86°F (20°C - 30°C)

Humidity: 50% - 70%

Paper: 75 g/m²or 20 lb Letter size

250 Sheets (20 lb)

Paper Tray

Multi-Purpose Tray

Manual Feed Tray

Printer Type

50 Sheets (20 lb) (MFC-8820D, MFC-8820DN only)

Single sheet (20 lb) (MFC-8420 only)

Laser

Print Method

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam

scanning

LCD (Liquid Crystal

Display)

22 characters ×5 lines

Warm-up

Max. 18 seconds at 73.4°F (23°C)

Power Source

Power Consumption

120V AC 50/60Hz (USA, Canadian Version Only)

Average Operating (Copying): 440 W or less (25°C)

Peak:

Sleep:

1090 W or less

14 W or less

16 W or less (When Network LAN board

(NC-9100h) is installed.)

Standby:

75 W or less (25°C)

Dimensions

Weight

21.28 x 17.76 x 18.76 (in.)

532 × 444 × 469 (mm)

Without Drum/Toner Unit:

MFC-8420: 36.6 lb/16.6 kg

MFC-8820D/MFC-8820DN: 39.9 lb/18.1 kg

Operating: 53 dB A or less

Noise

Standby:

30 dB A or less

SPECIFICATIONS S - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General (continued)

Temperature

Operating:

Storage:

50 - 90.5°F (10 - 32.5°C)

32 - 104°F (0 - 40°C)

Humidity

Operating:

Storage:

20 to 80% (without condensation)

10 to 90% (without condensation)

Print media

Paper Input

Paper Tray

■

Paper type:

Plain paper, recycled paper and

transparencies, envelopes (Manual

Feed/Multi-purpose Tray)

■

Paper size:

A4, Letter, Legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS),

Executive, A5, A6, B6 (ISO)

Weight: 16 - 28 lb (60 - 105 g/m²) (Paper Tray)

For more details, see Paper specifications for

each paper tray on page 2-4.

■

Maximum paper tray capacity: Approx. 250

sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m²) plain paper

Maximum multi-purpose tray capacity: Approx.

50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m²) plain paper

(MFC-8820D and MFC-8820DN only)

Manual Feed Tray/Multi-Purpose Tray

■

Paper size:

Width: 20 lb 2.75 - 8.66" (69.8- 220.0 mm)

Height:

4.57 - 16.00" (116.0- 406.4 mm)

(60 - 161 g/m²)

Weight: 16 - 43 lb

Paper Output

Up to 150 sheets of plain paper (Face down print

delivery to the output paper support)

Copy

Color/Monochrome

Monochrome

Copy Speed

Up to 17 copies/minute (Letter paper)

Multiple Copies

Enlarge/Reduce

Resolution

Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Max. 1200 x 600 dpi

S - 2 SPECIFICATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fax

Compatibility

Coding System

Modem Speed

ITU-T Group 3

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

33600-2400 bps

Automatic Fallback

Original Size

ADF Width:

ADF Height:

5.8" to 8.5" (148 mm to 216 mm)

5.8" to 14.0" (148 mm to 356 mm)

Scanner Width: Max. 8.48" (212 mm)

Scanner Height: Max. 14.0" (356 mm)

Scanning Width

Printing Width

Gray Scale

8.2 inches (208 mm)

64 levels

Polling Types

Contrast Control

Standard, Sequential

Automatic/Light/Dark

(manual setting)

Resolution

• Horizontal 203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)

• Vertical

• Standard 98 line/inch (3.85 line/mm)

• Fine, Photo 196 line/inch (7.7 line/mm)

• Superfine 392 line/inch (15.4 line/mm)

One-Touch Dial

40 (20 × 2)

Speed-Dial

300 stations

Automatic Redial

Auto Answer

one time

0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings

Public switched telephone network.

Up to 600^*1/500 pages

Communication Source

Memory Transmission

Out of Paper Reception

Up to 600^*1/500 pages

“Pages” refers to the “Brother Standard Chart No. 1” (a typical business letter, Standard resolution,

JBIG code).Specifications and printedmaterials are subject to changewithout prior notice.

"Pages" refers tothe "ITU-T TestChart#1" (atypical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).

Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

SPECIFICATIONS S - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scanner

Color/Monochrome

TWAIN Compliant

Yes (Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional

and Windows NT^®Workstation Version 4.0)

Mac OS 8.6-9.2/OS X 10.2.1 or greater

Yes (Windows^®XP)

WIA Compliant

Resolution

Up to 9,600 × 9,600 dpi (interpolated)*

Up to 600 × 2,400 dpi (optical)

* Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi scanning with

Windows^®XP (resolution up to 9600 x 9600 dpi

can be selected by using the Brother scanner

utility)

Document Size

ADF Width: 5.8" to 8.5" (148 mm to 216 mm)

ADF Height: 5.8" to 14.0" (148 mm to 356 mm)

Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5" (216 mm)

Scanner Glass Height: Max. 14.0" (356 mm)

Scanning Width

Gray Scale

8.35 inches (212 mm)

256 levels

Scanning directly to a networked PC isavailable with Windows^®

98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional and XP.

OS X scanning is supported in OS X 10.2.1 or greater.

S - 4 SPECIFICATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer

Emulation

PCL6 (Brother Printing System for Windows^®

emulation mode of HP LaserJet) and BR-Script

(PostScript^®) Level 3

Printer Driver

Windows^®95/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional/XP

and Windows NT^®Workstation Version 4.0 driver

supporting Brother Native Compression mode and

bi-directional capability

Apple^®Macintosh^®QuickDraw^®Driver and

PostScript (PPD) for OS 8.6-9.2/OS X 10.1/10.2.1

or Greater

Resolution

HQ1200 (Max. 2400 × 600 dots/inch)

Print Quality

Normal printing mode

Economy printing mode (saves toner usage)

Print Speed

Up to 17 pages/minute letter size

(when loading paper from paper tray)

Duplex Printing

Up to 8.5 pages/minute: (MFC-8820Dand

MFC-8820DNonly)

(8.5 sides per minute, 4.25 sheetsper minute)

First Print

Up to 12 seconds (using letter size paper in paper

tray)

Interfaces

Interface

Recommended Cable

Parallel

A bi-directional shielded parallel cable that is

IEEE 1284 compliant and not longer than

6 feet (2 m).

USB

A Hi-Speed USB 2.0 cable that is not longer than

6 feet (2 m).

Please make sure that you use a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 certified

cable if your computer uses a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface.

Even if your computer has a USB 1.1 interface you can connect

the MFC.

SPECIFICATIONS S - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Computer requirements

Minimum System Requirements

Available Har d Disk Space

Processor

Minimum

Sp eed

Recom m-

ended

RAM

Computer Platform & Operating

System Version

Mini mum

RAM

Application

Dr iver

Software*1

Pentium

75MHz

95, 98, 98SE

24 MB

32 MB

64 MB

Pentium

150MHz

Windows^®

Operating

Sy stem

100 MB

80 MB

Pentium

75MHz

NT^®Workstation4.0

2000 Professional

Pentium

133MHz

64 MB

32 MB

128MB

64 MB

Pentium

233MHz

180 MB

OS 8.6 - 9.2

(Printing, Scanning and

PC-FAX Send Only)

Apple^®

All base

Macintosh^®

Operating

Sy stem

models meet

minimum

Requirements

Mac OS X 10.1/10.2.1

or greater (Printing,

Scanning* , PC-FAX

50 MB

200 MB

128MB 160MB

SendandRemoteSetup

Only)

NOTE: USB is notsupportedunder Windows^®95 or Windows NT^®WS 4.0.

All registeredtrademarks referenced herein are the property of their respectivecompanies.

For the latestdrivers, go to theBrother Solutions Center at http://solutions.brother.com/

■

¹Application software is different for Windows^®and

Macintosh^®.

²Scanning is supported in 10.2.1 or greater.

S - 6 SPECIFICATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Consumable items

Toner Cartridge Life

Expectancy

TN-530: Standard Toner Cartridge - Up to 3,300*

pages

TN-560: High Yield Toner Cartridge - Up to 6,500*

pages

*(when printing letter size or A4 paper at 5% print

coverage)

Toner life expectancy will vary depending upon the

type of average print job.

Drum Unit Life

Expectancy

Up to 20,000 pages/drum unit (DR-500)

There are many factors that determine the actual

drum life, such as temperature, humidity, type of

paper, toner you use and number of pages per print

job.

SPECIFICATIONS S - 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network (LAN) board (NC-9100h)

MFC-8420 (Option)

When you add the optional Network (LAN) Board

(NC-9100h), you can connect your MFC into the

network to use the Internet FAX, Network Scanner,

Network Printer and Network Management

software operations for small workgroups.

MFC-8820D (Option)

MFC-8820DN (Standard)

SMTP/POP3 E-mail Services are required for

Internet Fax.

Support for:

Windows^®95/98/Me/NT^®4.0/2000/XP

Novell NetWare 3.X, 4.X, 5.X

Mac OS 8.6 - 9.2, X 10.0-10.2.1 or Greater

Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation

TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC

RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA, NetBIOS, WINS

LPR/LPD, Port9100, SMTP/POP3

SMB(NetBIOS/ IP), IPP, SSDP, Rendezvous, FTP

MIBII as well as Brother private MIB

TELNET, SNMP, HTTP, TFTP

Included Utilities:

BRAdmin Professional and Web Based

Management

■

Scanning directly to a networked PC is not

supported in Windows^®95, NT^®and Mac OS.

BRAdmin Professional is not supported in Mac

OS.

S - 8 SPECIFICATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

The items in the upper case represent LCD messages.

cleaning (routine maintenance)

drum unit .......................22-27

printer ...........................22-26

scanner .........................2 2-25

CNG tones .........................1-14

Combine items into a single file

attachment .....................14-11

connecting

ex t e rnal TAD ...................1-16

ex t e rnal telephone ..........1 -15

control panel, overview ........1-7

copy

access codes, storing and

dialing ................................7-7

a c cessories and supplies ........ii

ADF (Automatic Document

Feeder) ............................. 6-1

ADF cover ......................... 22-4

automatic

fax receive ........................ 5-1

fax re d i al ........................... 6-8

transmission .....................6-5

co n t r ast .........................10-16

default settings, changing

B r o adcasting ..................... 6-16

setting up Groups for ........ 7-4

B r o ther

.....................................10-16

Dupl e x /N in 1 ................10-11

Enlarge/Reduce ..............10-7

enter Copy mode ............1 0-1

keys ................................10-6

multiple ...........................10-4

paper ................................2 -1

Q u ality (type of original) ..10-8

scanner glass .................10-4

s i ngle .................... 10-3, 10-4

sort (ADF only) ...............10-9

temporary settings 10-2, 10-6

Tray Select ...................10-10

tray use ...........................4-11

using ADF .......................10-3

Cover page

accessories and supplies .....ii

Brother numbers .................. i

Cus t o mer Service ................. i

fax back syst e m ...................ii

Frequently Asked Questions

(FAQs) ................................ i

product support .................... i

test sheet, sending ........... 1-2

Warranties ..................iii, iv, v i

Brother Control Center

using and configuring ..... 14-1

Caller ID ...................5-14, 5 -15

canceling

fax forw a r ding ...................8-6

fax jobs in m emory ......... 6-11

jo b s awaiting redial ......... 6-11

paging .............................. 8-6

co m posing ......................6-12

cover page

custom comments ..........6-13

for all fax e s .....................6-15

for next fax only ..............6-14

printed f o rm ....................6-15

Credit Card Numbers ..........7-7

INDEX I - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

custom telephone features 1-22

entering text ........................ 4-3

envelopes ...........................2-3

error messages on LCD

Check Paper .................. 22-1

Comm. Error .................. 22-2

Not Registered ............... 22-3

Out of Memory ............... 22-3

while scanning a document

...................................... 10-5

exte n s i o n telephone, using . 5-7

external tel e phone ............1-15

Date and Time .................... 4-1

Delayed Batch Transmission

......................................... 6-20

Delayed Fax ..................... 6-19

dialing

a pause ............................ 7-8

access codes and credit card

numb e r s ......................... 7-7

au t o matic fax re d i al ......... 6-8

from an external phone .... 7-6

G r o ups ........................... 6-16

Search ............................. 7-5

Speed Dial numbers ........ 7-6

Distinctive Ring ................. 5-11

drivers

printer ............................ 12-1

TWAIN Compliant .......... 13-1

Windows^®

printer .......................... 11-1

drum unit

checking remaining life 22-37

replacing ...................... 22-34

Dual Access ....................... 6-9

Duplex/N in 1 key ........... 1 0-1 1

Duplex/1 in 1 ................ 10-13

Duplex/2 in 1 ................ 10-15

Duplex/4 in 1 ................ 10-15

fax codes

Fax R e c eive Code ...........5-7

Remo t e A ccess Code ...... 8-4

Telephone Answer Code . 5-7

Fax Forw a r ding ................... 8-1

changing remotely .....8-6, 8-7

programming a number .... 8-1

Fax St o r age ........................ 8-3

prin t i ng from ..................... 5-5

turning on ......................... 8-3

fax, stand-alone

receiving ...........................5-1

difficulty ..................... 22-13

dupl e x printing .............5-10

forw a r ding .............. 8-1, 8-6

polling ...................1-21, 5-9

re d ucing to fit on paper . 5-5

retrieving from a remote site

..................................... 8-7

r i ng delay, setting ..........5-2

sending

Easy Receive ..................... 5-4

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

......................................... 1-15

ecology

S c ann e r Lamp ............... 4-10

S l eep Time .................... 4-10

Toner Save ...................... 4-9

enter co p y m ode ............... 10-1

at end of conversation ... 6-5

automatic transmission . 6-5

canceling from memory

................................... 6-11

contrast ......................... 6-6

delayed ........................6-19

I - 2 INDEX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

f r om A DF ....................... 6-1

from memory (dual access)

......................................6-8

f r om sc a nner glass ........ 6-3

legal size from scanner glass

......................................6-4

manual transmission ..... 6-4

o v erse a s ...................... 6-18

Real Time Transmission

jams

original ............................22-4

paper ..............................2 2-4

LAN Configuration ... 3-11, 3-15

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

................................... 1-7, 3 -1

LCD Contrast ..................4-12

....................................6-10

resolution ....................... 6-7

Fax/Tel mode ......................5-1

answering at extension

maintenance, routine .......22-25

manual

phones ........................... 5-7

double-ringing (voice calls)

........................................5-3

Easy Receive ...................5-4

FAX Receive Code ........... 5-8

receiving faxes .................5-7

Setting F/T Ring Time ...... 5-3

Setting Ring Delay ........... 5-2

Telephone Answer Code ..5-7

FCC notices ...................... 21-1

receive ..............................5-1

transmission .....................6-4

manual feed tray ...... 11-5, 11-7

Memory Security ..... 6-22, 6 -23

Memory Storage ..................3-1

Menu table ...........................3-1

multi-line connections (PBX)

.........................................1-22

multi-purpose tray (MP tray) 2-1

OCR, changing setting ....15-11

One Touch numbers

st o r i ng ...............................7-1

OUT OF AREA ..................5-14

g r ay scale .................... S-3, S -4

Groups for Broadcasting ..... 7-4

HELP ...................................3-1

Help List .............................. 9-3

Page Counter ..................22-37

Paging ......................... 8-1, 8-2

programming your pager

number ...........................8-1

Paper ...........................2-1, S -2

ca p acity ............................2-3

jam ..................................22-4

Size ...................................4-6

s i z e o f o r i ginal ...................6-1

jacks

c o nvert to RJ11 jack ....... 1-19

EXT. jack

e x ternal telep h one ....... 1-15

TAD (answering machine)

....................................1-16

triplex adapter ................1-19

INDEX I - 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PaperPort^®

reports and lists ............ 11-18

resolution .........................S-5

Secure key ................... 11-16

specifications ...................S-5

two-sided (duplex printing)

...................................... 11-3

print media ..........................2-1

printer driver .................... 12-17

PS printer driver .............. 12-17

accessing ....................... 13-2

exporting ...................... 13-23

importing ...................... 13-22

PC FAX (For Windows^®) .. 17-1

receiving ...................... 17-18

sending

address book .............. 17-7

cover page ................ 1 7-1 3

facsimile style ........... 1 7-1 5

group ........................... 17-9

setting up .................. 17-13

s i mple style ............... 17-16

phone line

Quality k e y (c opyin g ) ........10-6

connections ................... 1-18

difficulties ..................... 22-13

m u l ti-line (PBX) .............. 1-22

roll-over lines ................. 1-19

two-line phone system ... 1-19

Polling

receiving .......................... 5-9

sequential receiving ....... 5-10

power

Receive mode

E x ternal TAD .................... 5-1

Fax Only ...........................5-1

Fax /T el .............................5-1

Ma n ual .............................5-1

Redial/Pause ...................... 6-8

reducing

copies .............................10-7

long faxes ......................... 5-5

Remote Retrieval ................ 8-5

access code .............. 8-4, 8-5

changing settings .............8-4

commands ....................... 8-6

get t i ng your faxes .............8-7

Reports ...............................9-1

Transmission Verification . 9-1

resolution

failure ............................... 3-1

area ............................... 10-1

difficulty ........................ 22-13

driver .............................. 12-1

emulation

Windows^®

............. 11-1, 1 1 -17, 12-1 7

Emulation Selection ..... 11-17

envelopes .................... 11-11

fax from memory .............. 5-5

improving the print quality

.................................... 22-18

jams .................... 22-6, 22-1 1

m a nual feed tray ............ 11-5

m u l ti-purpose tray .......... 11-6

on thick paper ................ 11-7

fax (standard, Fine, superFine,

Phot o ) .............................S-3

print ..................................S-5

S c an ........................13-6, S -4

setting for next fax ............6-7

Ring Delay, setting ..............5-2

I - 4 INDEX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

error messages on LCD .22-1

if you are having difficulty

Safety Instructions .......v i i, 21 -6

S c an n er Lamp ...................4-10

S c an n er Lock ..................22-22

S c an n i ng into PC ..............13-3

ScanSoft^®PaperPort^®.. 13-19

Scansoft^®TextBridge^®OCR

....................................13-22

Search, for stored numbers 7-5

Setup

Date and Time ..................4-1

Station ID (fax header) ..... 4-2

shipping the machine ...... 22-22

software

incoming calls ............22-14

paper handling ...........22-16

phone line difficulties .22-13

printer difficulties ........22-15

printing or receiving faxes

..................................22-13

two-line phone system .......1-19

Volume, setting ....................4-8

beeper ..............................4 -8

ring ....................................4-8

sp e aker .............................4-9

Brother Control Center ... 14-1

ScanSoft^®Paper Port^®

....................................13-19

Speed Dial .......................... 1-7

di a l i n g ............................... 7-6

st o r i ng .............................. 7-1

Warranties ............................. iii

Canada ............................... vi

Notice-Disclaimer ............... iii

USA .................................... iv

World Wide Web .....................i

TAD (Telephone Answering

Device), external

.........................1-16, 1 -21, 5 -1

c o nnecting ...................... 1-15

Rec e i ve Mode ..................5-1

Temporary Copy Settings .10-6

text, entering ....................... 4-3

Special Characters ........... 4-4

To change the default setting of

the scan, click on the Scan

Settings tab ..................... 15-9

Tone si g nals on Pulse line ..7-8

toner cartridge

replacing ............ 22-28, 2 2-29

tray use, setting

c o py ................................4-11

fax ..................................4-12

troubleshooting .................22-1

INDEX I - 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Retrieval Access card

If you plan to receive fax messages while away from your MFC,

carrying the Remote Retrieval Access Card printed below will serve

as a convenient reminder of the retrieval procedures. Simply cut out

the card and fold it to fit your wallet or organizer. Keeping it handy will

help you derive the full benefit of your MFC’sForwarding, Pagingand

Remote Retrieval features.

ADR

CSE

TIREVAL

MTOE

Fold

REMOTE RETRIEVAL ACCESS CARD R - 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fold

R - 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS

(Canada only)

NOTICE

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical

specifications.

NOTICE

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum

number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.

The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of

devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all

the devices does not exceed five.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Brother International Corporation

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

P.O. Box 6911

Bridgewater, NJ 08807–0911 USA

Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.

1 rue Hôtel de Ville,

Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, CANADA H9B 3H6

Visit us on the World Wide Web

http://www.brother.com

These machines are made for use in the USA and CANADA only. We cannot recommend

using them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that

country and the power requirements of your multi-function center may not be compatible

with the power available in foreign countries. Using USA or CANADA models overseas is

at your own risk and may void your warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Blue Rhino Outdoor Fireplace WAF517A User Manual
Braun Iron SI6285 User Manual
Braun Juicer MPZ 22 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Pressure Washer 20341 User Manual
Calibre UK Home Theater System VANTAGE HD User Manual
Capresso Coffeemaker 440 User Manual
Carrier Air Cleaner 40RM User Manual
Carrier Air Conditioner 51FP User Manual
Carrier Ventilation Hood 62E User Manual
Cisco Systems Computer Hardware WAVE694K9 User Manual